Chevrolet 2001 Blazer Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2001-Chevrolet-Blazer-Owners-Manual-813560 chevrolet-2001-chevrolet-blazer-owners-manual-813560 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 448

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Every
2001 Blazer
under warranty is
backed with the
following
services:

Courtesy
Transportation

1-800-CHEV-USA ®
( For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800 )
that provides in an emergency:

Free lockout assistance
Free dead-battery assistance
Free out-of-fuel assistance
Free flat-tire change
Emergency towing

2001 Chevrolet Blazer
Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number C2111 A First Edition

Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts

Air Bag Systems
Restraint Systems for Children

Features and Controls
Section 2

Windows
Keys and Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Endgate/Liftgate
Automatic Transmission (If Equipped)
Manual Transmission (If Equipped)
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers

Cruise Control
Exterior and Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStar® System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3

Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player

Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)

Your Driving and the Road
Section 4

Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering

Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Off-Road Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

Problems on the Road
Section 5

Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck

iii

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6

Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Brakes
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Maintenance Schedule
Section 7

Scheduled Maintenance
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8

Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications

Index
Section 9

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide
v

We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name BLAZER are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.
If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it
so the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

Safety Warnings and Symbols

2-Door Utility

4-Door Utility

About Driving Your Vehicle
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be sure to read the “on-pavement” and “off-road” driving
guidelines in this manual. (See “Your Driving, the Road
and Your Vehicle” and “Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” in the Index.)

How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.

CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.

vii

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different
colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

viii

Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle. Also see “Warning Lights and Gages” in the Index.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY

These symbols
are important for
you and your
passengers
whenever your
vehicle is driven:
CHILD
RESTRAINT
TOP STRAP
ANCHOR

DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:

These symbols
are on some of
your controls:

MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH

WINDSHIELD
WIPER

TURN
SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD
WASHER

PARKING
LAMPS

FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER

POWER
WINDOW

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS

AIR BAG

FOG LAMPS

WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER

REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER

These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:

Here are some
other symbols
you may see:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP

FUSE

BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM

LIGHTER

HORN
BRAKE

COOLANT

FUEL

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
VENTILATING
FAN

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

Service Station Guide
Battery
See Section 6

Cooling System
See Section 5

For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood

Tire Pressure
See Section 6

Spare Tire Pressure

See Section 6

See Section 5 & 6

Hood Release
See Section 6

Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6

Engine Oil Dipstick
See Section 6

Fuel

Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6

Use unleaded only.
See Section 6
for octane ratings.

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-10
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-22
1-23
1-23
1-29

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models with Front Bench Seat)

1-31
1-34
1-37
1-38
1-42
1-53
1-56
1-56
1-56

Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults (4-Door Models)
Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)
Children
Restraint Systems for Children
Older Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.

Manual Front Seat

CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

1-2

Move the lever located under the front of the manual
seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it.
Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.

Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, there will be a knob
on the outboard side of the
driver’s and passenger’s
bucket seats.

Power Seats (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on
the outboard side of your seat.

Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the
seat by raising or lowering the forward edge of
the control.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control. Move the seat forward or
rearward by moving the whole control toward the
front or the rear of the vehicle.

1-3

Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Vertical Control: Move the reclining front seatback
forward or rearward by moving the control toward the
front or rear of the vehicle.

Memory Seat (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control located
on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat looks like this.

Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, it is located on the
outboard side of the seat(s).

Use this memory function to save your seat cushion and
seatback settings by using the following procedure:

Press and hold the front of the control until you have
the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support,
press and hold the rear of the control.

1-4

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a safe and comfortable
driving position.
2. Press the SET button and then one of the two
numbered memory buttons. You will hear a chime
for each button pushed to confirm that your settings
have been placed in memory.
3. To program your keyless entry transmitter, if equipped,
press the UNLOCK button within five seconds of
programming the memory button. You will hear a
chime to confirm programming of the transmitter.

When your vehicle is in PARK (P) for an automatic
transmission or the parking brake is engaged for a
manual transmission, push and release the numbered
memory button you just stored. The seat will move to
the set position. You will hear one chime.
Pressing the UNLOCK button of a keyless entry
transmitter will adjust the seat to the corresponding
stored memory position. You will hear one chime.

Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the seats.

Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to readjust the seat. The transmitter
need not be reprogrammed unless it needs to correspond
to the other numbered memory button.
To set the seat for a second driver, follow the previous
steps, but use the other numbered button and the other
keyless entry transmitter.
If there is a third driver, use the seat adjuster switch to
adjust the seat. Pressing any of the seat adjuster switches,
the SET button or pressing the desired memory button
twice will cause the seat to stop moving.
If you push the numbered button to adjust the seat
and start the vehicle while the seat is still adjusting,
adjustment will pause while the ignition is in START.
Adjustment will resume after the ignition is in RUN.

This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and
lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats
for added comfort.
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on
low. Press the upper part of the switch to turn the heater
on high. Put the switch in the center position to turn the
heater off.
The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.

1-5

Reclining Front Seatbacks

To adjust a manual seatback, lift the lever on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to
an upright position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the vertical power seat
control described earlier, it allows the seatback to
recline also.

1-6

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.

Head Restraints

CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

Head restraints are fixed on some models and adjustable
on others. Slide an adjustable head restraint up or down
so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of
your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck
injury in a crash.

1-7

Seatback Latches

Easy Entry Seat (2-Door Models)
The front seatbacks fold
forward to let people get
into the back seat or to
access the storage area
behind the seat.
To fold a front seatback
forward, move the lever
located on the side of the
seat rearward and pull the
seatback forward.

To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the
seatback was reclined before being folded forward, it
will return to the reclined position.

The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get
in and out of the rear seat.
1. Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and
the whole seat will slide forward.
2. Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move
the seat rearward until it locks.

CAUTION:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it
can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person
sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used
it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat
to be sure it is locked.

CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward
in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to the person sitting there. Always press rearward
on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

1-8

Tilt the seatback completely forward and slide the whole
seat forward again to get out.

Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold
the seatbacks down for more cargo space.

To return the head restraints to the upright position,
reach behind the seats and pull the head restraint up
until it locks into position.
The rear seat release handles are located on the rear of
the seatbacks. Push back on the seatbacks as you pull
up on the handles. The head restraint will automatically
fold out of the way when the seatback is folded down.
To raise the seatbacks, just lift up the seatbacks and push
until they lock in the upright position. Push and pull on
the seatbacks to check that the latches have locked in
the upright position. If they haven’t, see your dealer
for service.

On two-door models with an inside mounted spare tire,
the driver’s side rear seat head restraint must be lifted
and held upright as the seatback is raised. Otherwise,
the head restraint will hit the spare tire and prevent the
seatback from properly latching.
Push and pull on the head restraints to check that they
have locked in the upright position. If they haven’t,
see your dealer for service.

1-9

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.

CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.

1-10

CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-11

Put someone on it.

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

or the instrument panel ...

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-13

Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-14

You could be -- whether you’re wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child
will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this
manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

1-15

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.

1-16

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-17

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit against your body.

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-18

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-19

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s
more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.

Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags -- one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and
comply with federal regulations.

Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:

CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during
a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting
things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. All air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air
bags are designed to work only in moderate to
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants,
air bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.

1-23

CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with air bags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.

CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Children.”

There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the
air bag symbol.

CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-24

The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.

How the Air Bag System Works

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-25

CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person. The path of
an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag, and
don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other air bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h).

1-26

The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range. If your vehicle strikes something
that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the
threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not
designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.

What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator,
which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air
bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts,
and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.

What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag
module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short time.
The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver
from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.

1-27

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they

inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module,
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
of the system, when the system commands air bag
inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.

1-28

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle

If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to
the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?

As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.

Is there anything I might add to the front of
the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?

Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure”
in the Index.

Center Front Passenger Position
(4-Door Models with Front Bench Seat)

Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in
the center position.

1-29

When you sit in the center front seating position, you have
a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-30

Rear Seat Passengers

Lap-Shoulder Belt

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.

The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock
if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

1-31

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-32

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit against your body.

1-33

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for Children and Small Adults
(4-Door Models)
Four-door models have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder
belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-34

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into
the slots of the guide.

1-35

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

1-36

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic
cord exposed.

Center Rear Passenger Position
(4-Door Models)

Lap Belt

When you sit in the center rear seating position,
you have a lap safety belt which has a retractor.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
3. Feed the lap belt into the retractor to tighten it.

1-37

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.

Infants and Young Children
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided by
the appropriate restraint. Young children should not use
the vehicle’s safety belts, unless there is no other choice.

4. Position and release it the same way as the lap part
of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-38

CAUTION: (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),
a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.

CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much -- until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-39

What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?

Add-on child restraints, which are purchased
by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height and age but also whether or not the restraint
will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it will be used.

CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer outstanding protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air
bag system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.

1-40

CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.

CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that vehicle’s regular
safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could cause serious or
fatal injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.

1-41

Restraint Systems for Children

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to
restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.
Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center
of the vehicle.

1-42

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.

1-43

Q:
A:

How do child restraints work?
A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which is
purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps.

1-44

A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat outside position
including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a
child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating air bag. Always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat outside position.
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat outside position.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-45

Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap,
it should be anchored.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a
kit is available.

Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are
located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.

1-46

To remove the plugs, grasp the edges of the plugs and
pull them out. See “Rear Convenience System” in the
Index for more information. Don’t use the rear set of
tie-down brackets near the liftgate/endgate or the center
tie-down bracket near the rear seats.
Anchor the top strap to one of these anchor points.
Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

If your vehicle is equipped with the rear convenience
system, there will be plugs covering the anchor brackets.

1-47

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-48

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

1-49

Center Seat Positions (4-Door Models)

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position

Don’t use child restraints in these positions.
The restraints won’t work properly.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.

1-50

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-51

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child restraint
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

1-52

Older Children

Q:
A:

What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should
not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-53

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must be
used by only one person at a time.

1-54

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,
but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear outside position of a
four-door model, see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” in the Index. If the child is so small that
the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s
face or neck, you might want to place the child in
a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-55

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-56

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If you ever see a label on
the driver’s or the right
front passenger’s safety belt
that says to replace the belt,
be sure to do so. Then the
new belt will be there to
help protect you in a
collision. You would see
this label on the belt near
the door opening.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the
time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system
parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-5
2-7
2-11
2-14
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-23
2-25
2-26
2-29
2-31
2-38
2-39

Windows
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Endgate/Liftgate
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Manual Transmission Operation
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
2-

2-43
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-53
2-56
2-58
2-61
2-76
2-80
2-80
2-84
2-89

Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
Locking Rear Axle
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Accessory Power Outlets
Sunroof (If Equipped)
HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel--Your
Information System
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-1

Windows
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially
with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-2

Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower your
manual side door windows.

Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
the armrests on each of the side doors. The switches
operate the windows when the ignition is RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. (See “Retained Accessory Power” in
the Index.) The driver’s door has a switch for the
passenger windows as well.
Press the side of the switch with the down arrow to
lower a window. Press the side of the switch with the
up arrow to raise the window.

2-3

Express-Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature
that allows you to lower it without holding the window
switch. Press the driver’s window switch down briefly
to activate the express-down feature. Lightly tap the
switch to open the window slightly. The express-down
feature can be interrupted at any time by pressing the
up arrow end of the switch.

Swing-Out Windows (2-Door Only)
If your vehicle has
rear swing-out windows,
unlatch them at the clasps
and push out on the glass
to open them.

Lockout Switch
Four-door vehicles have a lockout feature to prevent
passengers from operating the power windows. It is
located on the driver’s door armrest. Press LOCK to
activate this feature. Press NORM and the windows
will return to normal operation.

2-4

When you close the window, be sure the latch catches.

Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-5

This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition, endgate/liftgate,
spare tire lock (two-door
vehicles) and door locks.
It will fit with either
side up.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides the
owner with a pair of identical keys and a key code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to have
new ones made easily using this number. Your selling
dealer should also have this number.

2-6

NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your key inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an
extra key.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, contact
roadside assistance for help. See “Roadside Assistance”
in the Index for more information.

Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
D Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
won’t open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors aren’t locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
D Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
D Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:

D You can use the keyless entry system, if your vehicle
has this feature.

D You can use your key to unlock your door from
the outside.

D You can use the power lock switch (if equipped) to
lock or unlock the doors.

D To manually lock a door from the inside, slide the

manual lever on your door down. To manually
unlock a door from the inside, slide the lever on
the door up. You will see a colored area on the lever
when the door is unlocked.

2-7

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)

Programmable Automatic Door Locks
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will be equipped
with an auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to
program your vehicle’s power door locks.
The following is the list of available programming options:

D All doors lock/Driver’s door unlocks only: Press

the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel once and then the unlock side once. This
option is unavailable on most vehicles not equipped
with keyless entry.

D All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock

side of the power lock switch on the door panel once,
and then press the unlock side twice.

If your vehicle has power door locks, the switches are
located on the driver’s and passenger’s front armrests.
Remove the ignition key and press LOCK to lock all the
doors at once. To unlock the doors, press the raised area
to the right of the key symbol.
On four-door models use the manual door lock/unlock
lever on each rear door to lock or unlock those doors
from the rear seating area.

2-8

D All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
once, and then press the unlock side of the switch
three times.

D No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
twice. This turns off the automatic lock feature
(this is the factory setting).

Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have no
doors lock and none of the doors unlock. You can set the
automatic lock feature to lock all the doors when the
vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for
two seconds, and then unlock all the doors once the key
is removed from the ignition. The following instructions
detail how to program your door locks differently than
the factory setting. Choose one of the four programming
options listed above before entering the program mode.
To enter the program mode you need to do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition in OFF. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold it
there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and OFF twice. Then, with the
key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock and a 30 second program timer
will begin.

3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the four programming
options listed above, and follow the instructions.
You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.
If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks will
automatically lock and unlock to indicate that you
have left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock to indicate that you are leaving the program mode).
If the lock/unlock switches are not pressed while in the
programming mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting
will not be modified.
See your dealer for more information.

2-9

Rear Door Security Lock (If Equipped)
With this feature, you can
lock the rear doors so they
can’t be opened from the
inside by passengers.
To use the security locks:

The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door when the security lock is on, unlock
the door and open the door from the outside.

Lockout Prevention
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open, to
protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock and
the driver’s door will unlock.

Leaving Your Vehicle
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. You will find a security lock lever on the inside edge
of the rear door. Move the lever up to engage the
security lock. Move the lever down to disengage the
security lock.
3. Close the door.
4. Do the same thing to the other rear door.

2-10

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors and rear endgate from about 3 feet (1 m) up
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

D Check to determine if battery replacement or

blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

2-11

Operation

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle

UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s
door will unlock automatically, the parking lamps will
flash and the interior lamps will go on. If you press
UNLOCK again within three seconds, the remaining
doors will unlock, the parking lamps will flash and the
interior lamps will go on.

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.

LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
REAR: When you press the REAR button twice within
three seconds to release the rear liftgate glass, the
parking lamps will flash and the interior lamps will go
on. If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you must
engage the parking brake.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the key
transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.

2-12

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any
of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred
to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter
do the following:

1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of
the transmitter housing near the key ring hole.
Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.
This prevents anyone from recording and playing back
the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.

2-13

Endgate/Liftgate
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the rear
window, endgate or liftgate open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the rear window, endgate
or liftgate open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the rear window, endgate
or liftgate:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on VENT or OUTSIDE AIR. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-14

Endgate Release
To open a manual lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass.
To open a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn it counterclockwise.
All the doors will then unlock.
If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry system,
your vehicle does not have a lock on the endgate. It is
equipped with a pushbutton to release the glass.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the
power door locks (if equipped).

When the doors are
unlocked, press the
button to open the glass.

The endgate can be opened without a key if the driver’s
door is unlocked. The endgate glass will not release if
the vehicle is in gear.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock.

Liftgate Release
To open a power lock system from the outside, insert
the key into the lock button and turn counterclockwise.
All doors will unlock.
Reach inside the endgate
to lift the handle and open
the endgate.

If your vehicle is equipped with the keyless entry
system, your vehicle does not have a lock on the liftgate.
It is equipped with a pushbutton to release the liftglass.
You may also use the keyless entry system, or the power
door locks, (if equipped).

2-15

The liftglass can be opened
using the pushbutton on
the liftgate after the
driver’s door has been
opened using either the
power lock system or the
keyless entry system.

To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors
will lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or
the power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftglass.

2-16

Remote Rear Glass Release
This button, located to
the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel, allows you to
release the rear glass
from inside the vehicle.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, your shift
lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the
release to work.
If you have a manual transmission, you must apply your
parking brake or have the ignition off before you can
open the endgate glass.

Emergency Release for Opening
Endgate/Liftgate

Endgate-Mounted Spare
If your vehicle has an endgate-mounted spare tire

1. Peel back or slit the carpet locally to expose the
access hole in the trim panel.

carrier, you must move the carrier arm out of the way
to open the glass.

2. Use a thin screwdriver
to reach through the
access holes in both
the trim panel and the
hardware cover.

Here’s how to move the arm:

3. Pry the release lever toward the passenger’s side
until the glass latch pops open.
4. Reattach the carpet securely.

1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate.
You may need to give it a slight tug.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate.

2-17

Theft

Parking at Night

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission,
taking your key out also locks your transmission.
Also remember to lock the doors.

2-18

Parking Lots
Even if you park in a lot where someone will be
watching your vehicle, it’s still best to lock it up and
take your keys. But what if you have to leave your
ignition key? What if you have to leave something
valuable in your vehicle?

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.

D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.

D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY light will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Lock the door with the power door lock switch
(door must be open) or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter (door can be open or closed).
The SECURITY light should come on and stay on.
2. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY light goes off.

If a door is opened without the key or the keyless entry
transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps
will flash and the horn will sound for 110 seconds, then will
turn off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch (with the door open), or with the keyless entry
transmitter (door can be open or closed). You should
also remember that you can start your vehicle with the
correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.

D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the keyless
entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way
will set off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing UNLOCK on the keyless entry transmitter.
The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.

2-19

Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch (while the door is open), or
with the keyless entry transmitter (with the door
open or closed).
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the
fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by a dealer.

2-20

PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go
off approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing
before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you
turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at
this time. You may also want to check the fuse
(see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
See your dealer for service.

New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate “break-in.”
But it will perform better in the long run if you
follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.

Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to five
different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was
before you inserted the key.

2-21

NOTICE:

Don’t operate accessories in the ACCESSORY
position for long periods of time. Prolonged
operation of accessories in the ACCESSORY
position could drain your battery and prevent
you from starting your vehicle.

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.

LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.

CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only
to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while
the vehicle is moving.

2-22

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine
but still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must
have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off
(for example, if your vehicle is being towed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.

Key Release Button

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The key cannot be
removed from the ignition
of manual transmission
vehicles unless the key
release button is used.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work for up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof and overhead
console will work when the ignition key is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF,
these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes
or until a door is opened.

Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,
turn the key to OFF. Then turn the key to LOCK while
pressing the key release button down at the same time.
Pull the key straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to
LOCK and pull it straight out.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s
a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.

2-23

Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down -- that’s a safety feature.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2-24

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key in
START for not more than 10 seconds. Then, push
the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, unless it starts sooner.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the
accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0_F (-18_C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, behind the underhood fuse block.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.

2-25

Automatic Transmission Operation
Your automatic transmission may have a shift lever
located on the console between the seats or on the
steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
If your vehicle is equipped with a column shift lever,
it features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument panel cluster. This display must be
powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being
moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key
is in OFF, but not locked, there will be a small current
drain on your battery which could discharge your battery
over a period of time. If you need to leave your key
in the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start your engine because
your vehicle can’t move easily.

2-26

CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you
have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to
roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
(press the button in on the console shift lever) as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
into the gear you wish. See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)”
in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-27

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3)
when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on
steep hills or winding roads or for off-road driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

2-28

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t turn, don’t try to drive.
This might happen if you were stuck in very deep
sand or mud or were up against a solid object.
You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal.
This could overheat and damage the transmission.
Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold
your vehicle in position on a hill.

Tow/Haul Selector Switch (If Equipped)

Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed
This is your shift pattern.

Console Mount

Shift Mount

Your vehicle may be equipped with a tow/haul selector
switch. This switch will be located on the floor console
or on the side of the shift lever on some models.
If your vehicle is equipped with the tow/haul selector
switch, you can use this feature to more efficiently tow
or haul a heavy load.
To select the tow/haul mode, press in on the switch.
The Tow/Haul light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. To go back to normal operation, press the
switch again. The indicator light on the instrument panel
cluster will go out. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index
for more information.

Here’s how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

2-29

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift
into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake
pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal
and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal,
wait about six seconds, then shift into REVERSE (R).
Then let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing
the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
parking your vehicle.

Shift Light (If Equipped)
If you have a manual
transmission, you have
a SHIFT light on your
instrument panel cluster.

This light will show you when to shift to the next higher
gear for best fuel economy.

2-30

When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.

CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of your vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send
your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive.
You should use two-wheel high (2HI) for most
normal driving conditions.

NOTICE:
Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the
life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light
when the transfer case is in 4LO.

2-31

Electronic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your four-wheel-drive
vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, the transfer
case switches are to the
right of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give
you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on.
If the lights do not come on, you should take your
vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift
is completed.
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI

Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among three driving settings:

Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.

2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. When this lamp is lit, it is about
one-half as bright as the others.

Shifting from 4HI to 2HI

4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.

Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO

2-32

Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.

To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped

with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission. The preferred method for shifting into
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch.
You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO switch. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4LO indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4LO,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.

Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI, your vehicle must
be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI switch.
You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch
pedal engaged.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI switch. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing,
shift your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the
4HI indicator light remains illuminated before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4HI,
but you should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.

2-33

Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped
with the automatic transfer
case, the transfer case
switches are located to the
right of the steering wheel
on the instrument panel.

Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose among four driving settings:

2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best
fuel economy.
AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.

2-34

4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle.

NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information.

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle
to your dealer for service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain
illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some
reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift,
it will return to the last chosen setting.

CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
PARK (P), or if you have a manual transmission,
even if you are in gear. You or someone else could
be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.

If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in the Index for further information.
Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch.
This can be done at any speed, and the indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when
the shift is complete.

2-35

Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed.
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less
than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed
for vehicles with manual transmission. The preferred
method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle
moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and
release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the4LO
indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated
before shifting your transmission into gear.
If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch
pedal pressed for vehicles with manual transmission.
After 30 seconds, the transfer case will return to the
setting last chosen.

2-36

Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI, your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N),
or with the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with manual
transmission, and the engine running. The preferred
method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle
moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for
the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear.
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
less than 3mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) or with the clutch pedal pressed for
vehicles with manual transmission.

Shifting to NEUTRAL

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL

To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:

To shift out of NEUTRAL:

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

8.
9.
10.

Set the parking brake.
Start the vehicle.
Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or
have the clutch pedal pressed for vehicles with
manual transmission.
Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL light will
come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL
is complete.
Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second or FIRST (1) for vehicles with
manual transmission.
Turn the ignition to OFF.
Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P) or
FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.
Release the parking brake prior to towing.

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle with the transmission in PARK (P)
or FIRST (1) for vehicles with manual transmission.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case position
(2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or press the
clutch pedal for vehicles with manual transmission.
5. Shift the transmission lever to the desired position.
After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the NEUTRAL light will go out.
6. A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
of NEUTRAL.

2-37

Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Pull the BRAKE RELEASE lever fully. It is located on
the bottom of the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

2-38

Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, your
vehicle will be free to roll -- even if your shift
lever is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

D Pull the lever toward you.

2-39

Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).

D Hold in the button on the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.

2-40

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
For models with the tow/haul switch mounted on the
shift lever, use the following procedure to shift your
vehicle into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

D Hold in the button on the front of the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle
is in PARK (P).

2-41

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission Only)

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have
four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to
roll -- even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) -- if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic
Transfer Case)” in the Index. And, if you leave
the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others
could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with
the engine running unless you have to.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling
it toward you (or pressing the button on a console shift
lever). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t
fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-42

Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission
Operation” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. You must
press the shift lever button on the shift lever.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift
lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the
parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can
turn the ignition key to OFF, remove the key and release
the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling
a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

2-43

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:

CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.

2-44

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Blizzard” in the Index.

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll -- even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.

2-45

Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and
the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.

Horn

Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
If you have the tilt steering
wheel, you should adjust
the steering wheel before
you drive. The tilt lever is
located on the driver’s side
of the steering column,
under the turn signal lever.

To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.

You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

2-46

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the turn
or lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.

Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (If Equipped)

2-47

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is used.
With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will flash
even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make sure they
are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator light
on the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works
even if your headlamps are in the automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you
and the high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.

2-48

Windshield Wipers

Windshield Washer

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.

There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST.
Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For steady high-speed
wiping, turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers,
move the band to the OFF position.

CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

2-49

Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This switch is located on
the instrument panel to the
right of the steering wheel.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the switch to either
LO or HI. For delayed wiping, slide the switch to LO.
For steady wiping, slide the switch to HI. To turn the
wiper off, slide the switch to OFF.
To wash the window, press the wash button located on
the switch. The switch must be in either LO or HI.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not
your rear window, check your fluid level.

2-50

Cruise Control (If Equipped)
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you have an automatic transmission and you apply
your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
If you have a manual transmission and you apply
your brakes or push the clutch pedal, the cruise control
will shut off.

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where

you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.

2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from
ON to R/A.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the switch or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the
switch at R/A.

2-51

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control on Hills

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch briefly to R/A.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
D Press in the SET button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

D Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the clutch

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

2-52

Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.

D Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol
to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn off the
lamps and put the system in automatic headlamp mode.

Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel under the radio speaker grill.
Be sure it is not covered or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The parking lamp and headlamp knob is on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to
manually turn on the following:

D
D
D
D
D

Parking Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does
not affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.

2-53

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information

Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s
door is opened and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY. To turn the chime off, turn the knob all
the way to the left or turn the instrument panel dimmer
down to the fully dimmed position. In the automatic
mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is
in OFF.

Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful
in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.
Fully functional daytime running lights are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
reduced brightness when the following conditions are met:

D
D
D
D
D

The ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode,
the sensor detects daytime light,
an automatic transmission is not in PARK (P), and
the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.

2-54

The DRL system on some vehicles may turn off
temporarily while the turn signals are activated.
To idle an automatic transmission vehicle with the
DRL off, put the transmission in PARK (P). To idle a
manual transmission vehicle with the DRL off, set the
parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you shift out
of PARK (P) or release the parking brake.

Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your parking lamps must be on for your
fog lamps to work.

The following does not apply to vehicles sold in Canada.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) feature by following the steps below:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you that the
system is off. The system will revert back to the
automatic on mode when the ignition is turned to
OFF and then to RUN again.
3. To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME
OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds
(a chime will sound), or turn the ignition to OFF
and then to RUN again.

The fog lamp switch is located on the instrument panel
under the lamp switch. Press the switch to turn the
fog lamps on. Press the switch again to turn them off.
A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

2-55

Interior Lamps

Exit Lighting

Turn the thumbwheel next to the headlamp knob up
to make your instrument panel lights brighter. Turn the
thumbwheel all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition to help you see
while exiting the vehicle. If the DOME OVERRIDE
button is in the “out” position, these lamps will
stay on for a short period of time and then will go out.

Illuminated Entry

Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.

Press the button located near each lamp on the overhead
console to turn a reading lamp on and off. The lamps
can be swiveled to point in the desired direction.

Brightness Control

When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on if
the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out” position.
When the doors are closed, or the front door handles
are lifted and released, the lamps will stay on for a short
period of time and will turn off automatically. If you use
your keyless entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock
your vehicle, the interior lamps will come on for a short
time whether or not the DOME OVERRIDE button is in
the “out” position.

2-56

If you have the mini console, press the lens on each
lamp to turn it on or off.

Front Map Lamps (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has front map lamps, they are located
on the inside rearview mirror. They will automatically
come on for approximately 40 seconds when the
doors are unlocked with the keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped) or until the ignition key is turned to
RUN or ACCESSORY. The lamps will also stay on
for approximately 40 seconds after you exit the
vehicle unless you lock the doors with the keyless
entry transmitter.
You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
switch near each lamp.

Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all the way up to the top detent position. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on until they are
turned off.

You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened,
or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button
into the “in” position. With the button in this position,
the dome lamps will remain off when a door is open.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again and return it to the “out” position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will
come on when you open a door. This will override the
illuminated entry feature, unless you use your keyless
entry transmitter (if equipped) to unlock the vehicle.

Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity,
reading, glove box and underhood lamps if they are left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.
This will keep your battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:

D Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
D turn the ignition key to RUN.

2-57

Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.

2-58

Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview
Mirror (If Equipped)

This mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A photocell on the back of
the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside.
Another photocell built into the mirror surface senses
when headlamps are behind you.

At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a
few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime
state when the glare is reduced. The mirror will also
return to its clear daytime state when the vehicle is put
into REVERSE (R).

Electrochromic Day/Night Inside Rearview
Mirror with OnStarR (If Equipped)

Press the AUTO button at the base of the mirror to turn
on the automatic feature. The button has an indicator
light to show it is on. Press the OFF button to turn the
automatic feature off.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from the night back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electrochromic
day/night rearview mirror with the OnStar system.
This mirror functions exactly as the electrochromic
mirror described previously with the exception of the
three OnStar buttons located at the bottom of the
mirror face and the ON/OFF button to the left of the
OnStar controls. Press the ON/OFF button to turn on
the electrochromic mirror. Press the button again to
turn it off.
See your dealer for more information on subscribing to
OnStar. See “OnStar System” in the Index for more
information on using OnStar.

2-59

Outside Manual Adjust Mirror

Convex Outside Mirror

Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
of your vehicle.

A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more
from the driver’s seat.

You can fold them before entering a car wash. Pull the
mirrors in toward the vehicle. Push the mirrors back out
when finished.

Power Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped)
These controls are located
on the driver’s door armrest.

CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Electrochromic Outside Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
Only the driver’s side outside mirror will adjust for the
glare of headlamps behind you. See “Electrochromic
Day/Night Inside Rearview Mirror” earlier in this section.
Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the
driver’s or passenger’s mirror, then press the arrows on
the lower control to adjust the mirror in the direction
you want the mirror to go.

2-60

Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger
also warms the heated outside rearview mirrors to help
clear them of ice, snow and condensation. See “Rear
Window Defogger” in the Index for more information.

Power Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be
equipped with power folding
mirrors. This feature can be
helpful when taking your
vehicle through a car wash
or through narrow spaces.

To fold the mirrors in, press the blank side of the switch
located on the driver’s side door panel near the window.
To have the mirrors return to their normal position, press
the side of the switch with the graphic on it. The switch
will stay on in which ever position it is placed.
If at any time your mirrors become disengaged, fold the
mirrors out manually and then use the switch to fold the
mirrors in and out. This will assure that the power fold
unit in your mirrors is properly engaged.

Storage Compartments
Glove Box
To open your glove box, lift the lever on the front of the
glove box and lower the door. The glove box should not
be open while you are driving.

2-61

Overhead Console (If Equipped)

Reading Lamps
Press the button near each
lamp to turn the reading
lamps on and off.

The overhead console includes reading lamps, a
compartment for a garage door opener, a temperature and
compass display and a storage compartment for sunglasses.
Some models have a driver information system in the
console. See “Driver Information System” later in
this section.

2-62

The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the
desired direction.

Installing a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
compartment can be used to conveniently store
the opener.

If you have the optional HomeLinkR Transmitter,
please see “HomeLinkR Transmitter” in the Index
for instructions on how to use the system.
To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latch forward.

Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.

Press it firmly to the back of your garage door opener,
as close to the center of the opener as possible.
Center the garage door opener activation button over
the console door button and press the opener firmly
into place.
The pegs inside the
compartment door are used
to make sure the button on
the compartment door will
contact the control button
on the garage door opener.

Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when you
press the button.

2-63

Now, with the compartment
door closed, press the
button again to make sure
the garage door opener
operates properly.

With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you should only
have to press the button slightly to operate the opener.
Adjust the position of the garage door opener and
add or remove pegs, as needed, until the opener
operates properly.

2-64

Temperature and Compass Display

The outside air temperature and the compass are
displayed at the front of the overhead console.
The control buttons are located to the left of the display.

Turn the display on or off by pressing the ON/OFF
button. Display the temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (English) or Celsius (metric) by pressing
the US/MET button.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on.

Variance is the difference between magnetic north and
geographic north. In some areas, the difference between
the two can be great enough to cause false compass
readings. If this happens, follow these instructions to
set the variance for your particular location:

If the outside temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower
when you turn on the ignition, “ICE” will appear
on the display. This is a warning to the driver that road
conditions may be icy, and that appropriate precautions
should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need to
be manually set. However, when your vehicle is new,
the compass may function erratically. If it does, “CAL”
(Calibration) will appear on the display. To correct the
problem, drive in a complete 360 degree circle three
times, and the compass will function normally.

1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your
zone number.
2. Press and hold both the ON/OFF and the US/MET
buttons. The display will go off.

2-65

3. After five seconds, VAR CAL will appear on the
display. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears
on the display.
5. Press ON/OFF to enter your zone number.
Your variance is now set.
Driver Information System (If Equipped)
This system displays the outside air temperature,
compass direction and trip information in the
overhead console.
US/MET: The US/MET (United States/metric) button
allows you to switch the display between the English
and metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
between three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP
and TRIP.

2-66

COMP/TEMP: The display provides the outside
temperature and one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the
vehicle, the temperature indicated will be the last
outside temperature recorded with the ignition on.
If the outside temperature is 37_F (3_C) or lower,
the display will toggle between the word “ICE” and
the current temperature every eight seconds. This is a
warning to the driver that road conditions may be icy,
and that appropriate precautions should be taken.
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not need
to be manually set. However, if “C” (Calibration) is
displayed, the compass will need to be calibrated.
You may also place the compass in a noncalibrated
mode by pressing and holding the MODE and US/MET
buttons simultaneously while in the COMP/TEMP
mode. After about 10 seconds, the compass will display
“C” and you can release the buttons. Drive the vehicle
in a complete 360 degree circle three times at a speed of
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the compass will function
normally. Once the calibration is complete, the display
will return to a compass reading.

TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the
MODE button will step you through the following
TRIP functions:

1. Find your location on the zone map earlier in this
section. Record your zone number.

D INST ECON: Instantaneous fuel economy for the

2. Press and hold both the MODE and the US/MET
buttons in the COMP/TEMP mode.

D RANGE: The display indicates the estimated

3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears
on the display.
5. Press MODE to enter your zone number.
Your variance is now set and the display will
return to the COMP/TEMP mode.

D AVG ECON: The average fuel economy since the
last reset is displayed.

last second of driving is displayed.

distance that can be travelled with the remaining fuel
in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the last
few hours of driving.

D FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset
is displayed.

D AVG SPEED: The average speed since the last
reset is displayed.

To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two seconds.
All functions will be displayed for half a second once the
system is reset. Reset can only be performed in the
AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes.
All three modes are reset simultaneously.

2-67

Sunglasses Storage Compartment

Front Storage Area (If Equipped)

The console has a sunglasses storage compartment.
To open the compartment press the release button.
Then pull the compartment down.

If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it. You can
store cassettes and compact discs in the slots in front of
the compartment. There is also a lift-out storage tray
in the console.

Door Storage
You will find a storage compartment on each of the
front doors.
Four-door models have storage pockets and cupholders
on rear doors.

2-68

Some models will have a console with pop out cup
holders located on the front of the storage compartment.
If your vehicle has this console push in and release on the
cup holder door. The cupholders will pop out for use.

The console also contains the following components:

D
D
D
D

Convenience Net (If Equipped)

Rear Seat Audio Controls
Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
Six-disc CD Changer
Cellular Phone (if equipped)

For more information on these components, please see
the Index for that item.

You may have a convenience net in the rear of your vehicle
to help keep small items, like gloves and light clothing,
in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.

If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment,
lift the cover to expose the storage area which includes
slots for cassettes or compact discs and a coinholder.

Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side
of the endgate/liftgate opening (the label should be in
the upper passenger side corner, visible from the rear
of vehicle). Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie
downs on the floor.

2-69

Cargo Cover (If Equipped)

Cargo Tie Downs

If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to cover
items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

There are five cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you to
strap cargo in and keep it
from moving.

Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the posts
into the sockets on the inside trim panel on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle to secure it.

CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely reattached.

Rear Convenience System (If Equipped)

CAUTION:
If the convenience system isn’t secured properly,
it can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
secure the convenience system properly.

2-70

The convenience system, located in the rear of your vehicle,
provides a place to store loose items in your vehicle.

To increase the space in the convenience system,
do the following:
1. Remove the individual partitions (C) by pulling
upward on the partitions. Storage for the partitions
is located in area (F).
2. Then fold the collapsible dividers (A) by pulling
upward and folding the dividers toward each other.
To reinstall or rearrange the partitions, push down gently
on the partitions making sure both sides fit into the
appropriate slots of the collapsible dividers (A).
Located on the top of each collapsible divider (A) are
T-pins designed to hold grocery bags, etc., in an
upright position.

A. Collapsible Dividers
B. Anchor Bracket/
Cargo Tie-Down
Plugs
C. Partitions

D. Soda Pop/Gallon
Jug Holder
E. Partition Storage
F. Cargo Tie-Down
Cutouts

The anchor bracket/cargo tie down plugs (B), located in
the center and on each side of the convenience system
nearest the passenger compartment, are used to help seal
the convenience system. However, the plugs also cover
the anchor bracket /cargo tie-downs. To remove the
plugs, grasp the edges of the plugs and pull straight out.
See “Child Restraints” and “Top Strap” in the Index
for more information on using anchor brackets.

2-71

There are two cutouts (E) for the rear cargo tie-downs
located near the liftgate/endgate sill. In order to access
the rear cargo tie-downs, the cutouts must be removed.
You will also find a soda pop/gallon jug holder (D) on
the passenger side of the convenience system. Some
vehicles do not have this feature, but instead include a
smaller storage area.
To remove the entire convenience system,
do the following:
1. Remove the convenience net if it is in place.
See “Convenience Net” in the Index for more
information. You may also want to remove the
partitions (C) and fold the collapsible dividers (A)
to make the convenience system easier to handle.
2. Grasp the sides of the convenience system and push
the sides together while sliding the unit out until it
clears the sides of the liftgate/endgate opening.
To reinstall the convenience system, reverse the
removal procedure.

2-72

Luggage Carrier (Option)

CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier -- like paneling, plywood, a mattress,
and so forth -- the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose control.
What you are carrying could be violently torn
off, and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage your
vehicle. You may be able to carry something like
this inside. But, never carry something longer
or wider than the luggage carrier on top of
your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats, side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo. The adjustable tie
downs, at either end of the crossrails, should be used to
secure loads to the luggage carrier.

Use GM accessory racks that are compatible with
your luggage carrier for transporting sports equipment.
These are available through your GM dealer.
You can adjust the crossrails to handle loads of various
sizes. Just loosen the slider knobs at each end of the
crossrail and move them to where you want them.
Make sure both sides of the crossrails are even,
then tighten the slider knobs.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Follow these guidelines:

D Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is
not recommended.

D Tie the load to the tie downs (at either end of

the crossrails). When loading cargo directly on
the roof panel, use the crossrails to keep the load
from shifting.

D If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails

as far apart as possible. Tie the load to the tie downs
provided. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not
tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails
are damaged.

NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs.
(91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. When you carry large things, never let
them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. When loading cargo on the roof panel,
be sure it rests on the slats and does not scratch
or damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward as you can and move the
rear crossrail forward as far as possible to keep
the load from shifting.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading
your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity
and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and
cargo are still securely fastened.

2-73

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Sun Visors

Pull the front ashtray door down to open it.

To block out glare, you can pull the visor down.
You can also swing the visor from side-to-side.

NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into
your ashtray. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking
materials could set them on fire, causing damage.
To remove the front ashtray, pull the bin upward.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overload, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.

2-74

Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down and lift the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps.

Accessory Inflator (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an air inflator
system. With it, you can inflate things like air mattresses
and basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your
tires up to the proper pressure.
The air inflator is located
in the rear compartment on
the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. To remove the
cover, pull the tab on the
cover and pull it off.

The air inflator kit includes an 18-foot (5.5 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.

CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it explode,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read
the inflator instructions, and inflate any object
only to its recommended pressure.
To use your air inflator
attach the appropriate
nozzle adapter, if required,
to the end of the hose.
Then attach that end of
the hose to the object you
wish to inflate. Remove the
protective cap covering the
outlet. Attach the other end
of the hose to the outlet.
Press the ON switch.
If the air inflator system does not turn on, the fuse may
be blown or installed incorrectly. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index or see your dealer for service.

2-75

Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about
10 minutes. To reset, press the ON switch again.
Don’t run your air inflator for longer than 30 minutes
at one time. If you do, you may damage the system.
After 30 minutes, wait at least 10 minutes before
restarting the air inflator.
To turn off the air inflator, press OFF and detach the
hose, first from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
Replace the protective cap. Place the inflator kit tools in
the pouch and store them properly.
To replace the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover and put it in place.

Some vehicles will have a small cover which must be
pulled down to access the accessory power outlets.
These vehicles will also have another power outlet
located in the lower rear of the center console.
Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlets and could result in blown
vehicle adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see
your dealer for additional information on accessory
power plugs.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.

See your dealer for more information on using the
accessory inflator.

NOTICE:

Accessory Power Outlets

Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damage it or keep other things from working
as they should. This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
anything that exceeds the fuse rating.

With the accessory power outlets, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment. The accessory power
outlets are located near the center of the vehicle on the
lower part of the instrument panel. Just remove the
plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation
instructions that are included with any electrical
equipment you install.

2-76

OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications system that
offers a variety of services and provides a hands-free
communication link between you and the OnStar Center.
A service subscription agreement and fee are required in
order to receive OnStar service. Services are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For more information,
call 1-888-ONSTAR-7 (1-888-667-8277).

Emergency Button: In an emergency situation,
press the emergency service button. Upon receiving the
call, an advisor at the center will locate your vehicle and
assess the situation. If necessary, the advisor will alert
the nearest emergency service provider.
Call ANSWER/END Button: Use this button
to answer a call. (If you are receiving a call, the audio
system will mute, and the ring will be heard). Press this
button at the end of a call to disconnect and return the
audio system to its previous settings. This button will
also cancel a call if one of the buttons is accidentally
pressed or if the automatic redial function is activated.
Volume Control: You can control the volume of the
OnStar System using either the volume control knob
on the radio or using the steering wheel volume control
(if equipped).

OnStar Services Button: Press this button once
to contact an advisor who will be able to assist you with
these services. If you are not quickly connected, the
system will automatically reset and redial. This ensures
connection to the center; there is no additional action
required. Press the Call Answer/End button to cancel the
automatic redial.

Telltale Light: This light will indicate the status of the
system. A solid green light will come on when you start
the vehicle to let you know that the system is on and is
ready to make or receive calls.
If the light blinks green it means that an incoming
or outgoing call is in progress. Press the Call
ANSWER/END button if you notice the light
blinking and you are not on a call.

2-77

The light will be red in the event of an OnStar system
malfunction. If this occurs press the OnStar button to
attempt to contact an advisor. If the connection is made,
the advisor will assist you with steps to take to make
sure that the system is functioning properly. If you
cannot contact the advisor, take your vehicle to your
dealership as soon as possible for assistance.

Safety and Security Services
D Automatic Notification of Air Bag
Deployment -- If an air bag deploys, a priority
emergency signal is automatically sent to the center.
An advisor will locate your vehicle’s position, try to
contact you and assist you in the situation. If the
center is unable to contact you, an emergency service
provider will be contacted.

D Stolen Vehicle Tracking -- Call the center at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) to report your
vehicle stolen. The system can then locate and track
your vehicle and the advisor will be able to notify
the proper authorities.

D Roadside Assistance with Location -- For vehicle
breakdowns, press the OnStar button. An advisor
will contact the appropriate help.

2-78

D Remote Diagnostics -- If an instrument panel light
comes on, the center can perform a check of the
engine on-board computer. An advisor can then
recommend what action needs to be taken.

D OnStar MED-NET -- Med-Net can store your

personal medical history and provide it to emergency
personnel if necessary.

D Accident Assist -- An advisor can provide
step-by-step guidance following an accident.
D Remote Door Unlock -- To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to unlock itself.
The advisor can delay unlocking your vehicle.
Remote Door Unlock is disabled 48 hours after
the vehicle is parked to maintain the battery charge.

D Vehicle Locator Service -- To contact the center,
call 1-888-4-ONSTAR. You will be required to
provide your security information. An advisor will
send a command to your vehicle to sound the horn
and/or flash the lamps.
In order to provide you with excellent service, calls with
the OnStar Center may be monitored or recorded.

Premium Services (Includes Safety and
Security Services)
D Route Support -- An advisor can provide directions

or guidance to anywhere you want to go. In addition,
they can help you locate gas stations, rest areas,
ATMs, hospitals, hotels, stores, eateries and more.

D Concierge Services -- The concierge advisor can

obtain tickets, reservations, or help with vacation/trip
planning and other unique items and services.

D Ride Assist -- An advisor can locate transportation
in the event that you are unable to drive.

OnStar System Limitations
Complete limitations can be found on the Subscriber
Services Agreement.
OnStar Service is:

D available in the 48 contiguous United States, Alaska,

D subject to limitations caused by atmospheric

conditions, such as severe weather or topographical
conditions, such as mountainous terrain;

D subject to cellular carrier equipment limitations.
Global positioning capabilities used to deliver
OnStar Service will not be available if satellite
signals are obstructed.
OnStar will not function if the vehicle’s battery is
discharged or disconnected. It may also be inoperative
if the vehicle is in an accident and the OnStar or vehicle
electrical system components are damaged.
Safety and security services are provided by existing
governmental emergency service providers. OnStar
will use reasonable efforts to contact the appropriate
emergency service provider and request assistance but
cannot promise that they will respond to the call in a
timely manner or at all.

Hawaii and Canada;

D available when the vehicle is within the operating
range of a cellular provider;

2-79

Sunroof (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof.
To open or close your sunroof, the ignition needs to be in
RUN or ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) needs to be active. See “Retained Accessory Power”
in the Index.

You can press the forward side of the button to close
the sunroof. Once the sunroof is closed, press the
forward side of the button to open the sunroof to the
vent position.
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.

HomeLinkR Transmitter
(If Equipped)

Press and release the rear side of the button in the mini
console to open the sunroof.
Mini Console

2-80

Programming the Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.

Full-Size Console
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold
down the two outside buttons on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.
This procedure initializes the memory and erases any
previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you
can still see the indicator light.

2-81

3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons
through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red
light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash rapidly.
The rapid flashing indicates that the HomeLink
Transmitter has been programmed. Release both
buttons once the light starts to flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the HomeLink
Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, turn the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The HomeLink Transmitter may not work
with older garage door openers that do not meet current
Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to
“Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes”
later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the
unit at 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
HomeLink Transmitter.

2-82

Canadian Owners: During programming,
the hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you
should press and re-press the button on the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the
button on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release both
buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink
Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.

Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on the
HomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes on
while the signal is being transmitted.
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage
door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured
after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling
code” system. A rolling code system changes the code
of the garage door opener every time you open or close
the garage door.
To determine if you have this system, press the button on the
HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmed already.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for one or two seconds,
then turns solid, the garage door opener has a rolling code
system. In a rolling code system, the garage door motor
head unit must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.

Training a Garage Door Opener with a
“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the
hand-held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter,
see “Programming the Transmitter” listed previously.
If you have completed this programming already, you
now need to train the garage door opener motor head
unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter. Refer to
your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper
transmitter training procedure for your garage door
opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. The exact location and color will
vary by garage door opener brand. If you have
difficulty finding the training button, refer to your
garage door opener owner’s manual.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
programming the transmitter.
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to flash
when the motor head unit enters the training mode.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.

3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your
vehicle and firmly press and release the HomeLink
Transmitter button you have already programmed for
two or three seconds. Press and release the button
again (you may need to do this step up to three times)
to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter has been
trained to the garage door opener motor head unit.
Check that the training was successful. The motor
head unit indicator light should no longer be flashing.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the
HomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter
to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, call the
manufacturer of the unit at 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

Accessories
Accessories for the HomeLink Transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-3515.

2-83

The Instrument Panel--Your Information System

2-84

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Vents

H. Audio Steering Controls (If Equipped)

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

I. Rear Window Washer/Wiper

C. Instrument Panel Cluster

J. Rear Liftgate/Endgate Release

D. Transfer Case Controls (If Equipped)

K. Comfort Controls

E. Lamp Controls

L. Rear Window Defogger

F. Fog Lamps (if equipped)

M. Audio System

G. Brake Release

N. Glove Box

2-85

Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

Standard Automatic Transmission Cluster, Canada similar

2-86

Optional Automatic Transmission Cluster, Canada similar

2-87

Speedometer and Odometer

Tachometer (If Equipped)

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip odometer button.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be.
But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the button near the
readout. To reset the trip odometer, hold the button
until it resets.

2-88

NOTICE:
On vehicles with a manual transmission, if you
operate the engine with the tachometer in the
shaded warning areas, your vehicle’s engine or
other parts of your vehicle could be damaged.
Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by
operating the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning areas isn’t covered by your
vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the tachometer
in the shaded warning areas.

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for
about 55 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

2-89

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the
air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.

2-90

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Charging System Indicator Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is on (in RUN), this gage
shows your battery’s state
of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.

2-91

You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.

Shift Light
You have the shift light
on the instrument panel
cluster if you have a
manual transmission.

Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The light
will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released,
it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get
the best fuel economy. See “Shift Light” in the Index.

United States

2-92

Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.

CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.
See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-93

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light in the United
States or Check Engine Light in Canada)

United States
United States

Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine
is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
more information.

2-94

Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE
light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system
is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust, intake or fuel system of your vehicle or
the replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls
and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON
OR CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
D Light On Steady -- An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

2-95

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.

2-96

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See “Fuel” in the Index. Poor fuel quality will cause
your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Oil Pressure Gage

Some state/provincial and local governments have or may
begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE
light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

United States

Canada

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).

CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.

2-97

NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems
can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or other problems causing low
oil pressure.

If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock,
and you should see your dealer.
Also, see “Content Theft-Deterrent” in the Index for
additional information regarding the SECURITY light.

Service Four-Wheel-Drive Warning Light
(If Equipped)
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.

Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the key toward START.
The light will stay on
until the engine starts.
If the light flashes, the PasslockR system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock”
in the Index.

2-98

The SERVICE 4WD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

Tow/Haul Mode Light (If Equipped)

Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on, your
liftgate or liftglass is ajar.
Try closing the liftgate or
liftglass again. Never drive
with the liftgate or liftglass
even partially open.

This light should come on
when the tow/haul mode
has been selected.

For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index.

Fuel Gage

Check Gages Light
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil pressure
gages to see if they are in the warning zones.

United States

Canada

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.

2-99

Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

D At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.

D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the

Low Fuel Light
The LOW FUEL light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.

gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.

D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.

D The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.

2-100

This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See “Fuel” in
the Index.

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-13
3-15

Comfort Controls
Standard Climate Control System
Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems with SET Button
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR and
MN Buttons
AM-FM Stereo
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

3-20
3-25
3-29
3-33
3-34
3-38
3-42
3-44
3-45
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-48
3-48

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)
Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped)
Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna

3-1

Comfort Controls

Temperature Knob

With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger
area of your vehicle. Move the knob clockwise
toward the red area for warmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.

Standard Climate Control System

Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
OFF: This setting turns the system off. Some outside
air will still enter the vehicle whenever the vehicle is
moving forward. If outside air entering the vehicle is
warmer than desired, turn the temperature knob fully
counterclockwise and turn the mode knob to VENT.
Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel
controls the fan speed. To increase airflow, move the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.

3-2

MAX A/C: This setting provides maximum cooling
with the least amount of work. MAX A/C recirculates
much of the air inside your vehicle so it cools quickly.
This setting directs most of the air through the
instrument panel vents and a small amount through
the floor vents.

A/C: This setting cools the air entering your vehicle
and directs most of the air through the instrument panel
vents and a small amount through the floor vents.

Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)

BI-LEVEL A/C: This setting cools the air
entering your vehicle and directs it through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
VENT: This setting directs most of the air through
the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through
the floor outlets. The air conditioning compressor is not
working when VENT is selected.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some
air through the windshield defroster outlets.
BLEND: This setting divides the airflow equally
between the heater floor outlets and the windshield
defroster outlets.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater (floor) outlets.

Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the electronic climate
control panel controls the fan speed. To manually
increase airflow, move the knob clockwise. To manually
decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.
OFF: If the knob is in OFF, outside air will still enter
the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob.
AUTO: If the knob is in AUTO, the fan speed will
vary as the system maintains the selected temperature.

3-3

Temperature Knob

Mode Knob - Automatic Operation

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the desired air temperature in your vehicle. This knob
will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature
independently of the function knob setting. Move the
knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air. Move the
knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air.

The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. When the system is
set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air
delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or
instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the
windshield to prevent fogging.

Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past
82_F (28_C), the system will go into the “full hot”
mode. The system will remain at that maximum heating
setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is
set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.

When the system is in AUTO mode, the air conditioning
light will turn on, and the recirculation and outside air
lights turn off. With the system in full auto control
(both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still
have the ability to override any function. However,
continually overriding the outside air or the A/C
compressor will limit the ability of the system to cool
the vehicle quickly.

Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past
66_F (19_C), the system will go into the “full cold”
mode. The system will remain at that maximum cooling
setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is
set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
system to heat or cool any faster.

3-4

If you push a button for a function which is not
available, the light next to that button will flash three
times to alert you that it’s not available.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 74_F (23_C)
setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to
adjust the temperature if necessary.

With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the
air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need for
heat, the airflow will be directed out of the floor outlets.
As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting,
the fan speed will decrease. To maintain interior comfort,
the airflow will adjust between the instrument panel air
outlets and floor outlets. On bright sunny days in cool
weather, the airflow may come out of the air conditioning
and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to maintain comfort and
prevent stuffiness.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air temperature,
engine coolant temperature or the time since the engine was
last started. As the coolant warms up, the fan speed will
gradually increase and air will flow from the heater outlets,
with some airflow to the windshield to prevent fogging
under most normal conditions.
If your vehicle is sitting out on a warm day and you
have the fan set on AUTO, the air will first flow out of
the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal.
This is to expel hot air from the air outlets.

As the air is cooled, the airflow will move through the
air conditioning outlets.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located around the center of the instrument panel.
This sensor is used by the automatic system to
regulate temperature.
Mode Knob - Manual Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
You can choose to set the climate control system
operations yourself, or let the system work for you
by placing the system in AUTO mode. See “Mode
Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.
VENT: This setting directs most of the air through
the instrument panel outlets and a small amount through
the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL: This setting directs air through
the heater floor outlets as well as the instrument
panel outlets.

3-5

HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some
air through the windshield defroster outlets.
BLEND: This setting divides airflow equally
between the heater floor outlet and the windshield
defroster outlets. The air conditioning compressor may
run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may run
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to force
the system to use outside air. Press it again to close off
the outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.

RECIRCULATION: Press this button to
limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle.
This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors
entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the
system will use recirculation as necessary to cool
the air. Pressing the recirculation button will change
the operation to a manual mode. Press this button
again to turn off the recirculation feature.
RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan knob
in OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering
your vehicle.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.
Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level at which air
conditioning is ineffective.
Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform
well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.

3-6

Air Conditioning

Heating

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.

The heater works best if you keep your windows closed
while using it. On cold days, use HEATER with the
temperature knob turned clockwise. BLEND is useful
in cool weather when you have fog or ice on the
windshield or side windows.

For quick cool-down on very hot days, use MAX A/C
with the temperature knob turned to the left. This setting
should be used to keep odors and/or dust from entering
the vehicle. For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C
with the temperature knob turned to the left.
On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Climate Control
system, this same performance can be achieved as long as
the A/C is on and the outside air button is not active.
On cool but sunny days, use BI-LEVEL A/C to deliver
warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument
panel outlets.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed
and power. This is normal because the system is
designed to cycle the compressor on and off to keep
the desired temperature.

If you use the optional engine coolant heater before
starting your engine, your heating system will produce
warmer air faster to heat the passenger compartment in
cold weather. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.

Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use BLEND to keep the
windshield and side windows clear.
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the
windshield quickly in extreme humid or cold conditions.
Turn the temperature knob to the right and move the
fan knob toward high.

3-7

Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
option, the rear window
will have lines that
warm the glass.

Pressing the REAR button on your climate control
system will also activate your heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). This will help to keep ice and snow from
collecting on your mirror surfaces.
The rear window defogger will stay on for five to seven
minutes, then turn off. If you need additional warming
time, turn it on again. You can turn the defogger off at
any time by pressing the button.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.

For best results, clear the window of as much snow or
ice as possible before using the rear window defogger.
To turn on the rear window defogger, find the button
marked REAR with the defog symbol on the lower right
corner of your climate control system. Press the button
until the light in the button comes on, then release it.
It will only work if the ignition switch is turned to RUN.

3-8

NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use PANEL or VENT to direct
outside air through your vehicle. Airflow is through the
instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to
the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. When the
vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow
through by selecting any mode and any fan speed.

You can direct the airflow side-to-side by turning the
thumbwheel located in the center of the vent. The vent
can be tilted up and down also. To control the amount
of airflow through the outlets, turn the thumbwheel
below the vent.
Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, move the
fan knob to high for a few moments before driving
off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.

You will find air outlets in the center and on the sides of
your instrument panel.

3-9

Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is off. See ”Retained
Accessory Power” in the Index.

3-10

Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until
the correct hour appears on the display.

Setting the Clock for Systems with HR
and MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.

AM-FM Stereo

Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.

Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off
and controls the volume. To increase volume and
turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the
radio off.

SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of
each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display.
The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher
station, play that station for a few seconds, then SCAN
to the next higher station. Press VOLUME or both
SEEK buttons to stop scanning.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.

3-11

PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:

3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.

1. Turn the radio on.

4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.

2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

Setting the Tone

3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.

5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.

TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Adjusting the Speakers

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:

BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.

1. Tune in the desired station.

FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.

2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

3-12

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)

Finding a Station
AM FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM, FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.

Playing the Radio

3. Tune in the desired station.

VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off
and controls the volume. To increase volume and
turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it
counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the
radio off.

4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off
by pressing this knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return.

3-13

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your
preset stations. The system will scan through and play
each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop
scanning through the preset stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.

Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.

3-14

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop
the tape and play the radio.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you
clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds
to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
3. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing
that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.

Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of being turned continuously.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

3-15

SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at
the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

3. Tune in the desired station.

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.

3-16

5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone you
selected will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored
on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds
before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from
its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble.
When the TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.

3-17

Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.

Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you
do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow
will be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.

Playing a Cassette Tape

PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side
of the tape to the other.

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.

3-18

REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to
the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.

(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.

TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either
the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with
the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you
clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds
to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.

AM FM: Press this button to switch from a tape
to the radio.

3-19

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player are six BoseR high performance speakers and a six
channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of being turned continuously.

3-20

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press it again to turn on the sound.
REAR DSPL (Vehicles with Rear Seat Audio):
If your vehicle has rear seat audio, then it will have a
button labeled REAR DSPL instead of the MUTE
button. When the main radio is turned on, press this
button to turn the rear seat audio display on the
main radio. Press it again to turn the rear seat audio
display off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off
by pressing this button. When the radio is playing,
press this button to recall the station frequency.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at
the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it
to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its
stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.

3-21

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored
on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one
of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for
the location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds
before advancing to the next preset station.

3-22

Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from
its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from
its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a
station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well
in this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the
display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape
is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side
of the tape to the other.

NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right
arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape
to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.

(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the
tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.

3-23

AM FM: Press this button to switch from a tape
to the radio.
CD TAPE: Press this button if you have a tape loaded
in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on, to
play a tape. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a tape is playing. Press CD TAPE to switch between
the tape player, remote CD and console-mounted
CD changer if all are loaded. When a tape is playing,
a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the
direction of play. (If the radio is turned off, the tape
stays in the player and will resume playing at the point
where it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either
the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with
the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you
clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds
to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.

3-24

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the CD TAPE button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of turning continuously.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it
to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its
stored position when you’re not using it.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.

3-25

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return and the tone you
selected will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P.SCAN.

3-26

It will scan through each station stored on your
pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one
of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for
the location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds
before advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the
BASS control is turned, the AUTO TONE display will
go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is turned, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(You can also turn the system on when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and
the disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also
appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,
the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
D You are driving on a very rough road.
(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)
D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.

3-27

RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display.
Sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play.
Press RECALL again to return to the time display.

3-28

AM FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,
the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at
the point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.
To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.
If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more
than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.
The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is
off, press this button to load a CD.

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
(BoseR) (If Equipped)

Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player are six Bose high performance speakers and a six
channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of turning continuously.

3-29

Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back
into its stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.

3-30

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
button. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored
on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one
of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for
the location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1 through P6) for several seconds
before advancing to the next preset station.

Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.

Playing a Compact Disc

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to
increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble.
If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.

Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the
disc should play. The letters CD and a CD symbol will
appear on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD,
the letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:

PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on.
(You can also turn the system on when you insert a
compact disc into the player with the ignition on.)

D You are driving on a very rough road.

(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)

D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.

3-31

3-32

AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,
the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at
the point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the CD player and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to switch
between the compact disc player and console-mounted
CD changer if both are loaded. When a disc is playing,
the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the
display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays in
the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new
disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.
If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more
than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.
The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is
off, press this button to load a CD.

Remote Cassette Tape Player (If Equipped)

A lighted tape symbol shows when a cassette tape is in
the player. A lighted arrow will also appear and show the
direction of play when a tape is active.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
Anytime a cassette tape is inserted, the top side is
selected for play first.

If you have an AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
Automatic Tone Control System that includes a remote
cassette player, the cassette player is located in the front
of the center console.
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, first press
EJECT on the remote player. Then, insert the cassette tape.
The tape will play if the ignition is on but the radio is off.
Once the tape is playing, use the control knobs for VOL,
AUTO TONE, BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as
you do for the radio.

PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow (in the
opposite direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
points) to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is needed for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation and the
sound is muted in this mode.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow
(in the direction that the lighted tape direction arrow
points) to search for the next selection. The tape
direction arrow will blink during SEEK operation and
the sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape.
The tape will rapidly reverse to the beginning of the
cassette reel or until you press REV again. The radio
plays the last selected station during REV.

3-33

(5): Press this pushbutton to turn Dolby NR on
and off. Dolby NR is active when a tape is inserted in
the remote cassette. The double-D symbol will appear
on the display.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (If Equipped)

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly advance the tape.
The tape will rapidly advance to the end of the cassette
reel or until you press FWD again. The radio plays the
last selected station during FWD.
PROG: Press this button on the remote player to go
from one side of the tape to the other.
TAPE: Press the AM-FM button to switch from the
player and the radio when a tape is playing. To return to
the tape player, press CD AUX. The lighted arrow will
appear next to the symbol and show the direction of
play when a tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to
remove the tape. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. Also, you must press EJECT before
loading a cassette with the radio off to allow loading.

3-34

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources, including AM-FM,
cassette tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) controller. However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to.

For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a
cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens
to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones. Be aware that the front seat audio controls
always have priority over the RSA controls. The front
seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote
source. The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA
power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions
even when the main radio is off.
This feature is intended for rear seat passengers.
The following function is controlled by the knob on the
main radio:
PWR-VOL: Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
PWR: Press this button to turn RSA on or off.

VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and
counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob
back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the
right VOL knob controls the right headphone.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. If the front passengers are already
listening to AM-FM, the RSA controller will not switch
between the bands and cannot change the frequency.
SEEK: While listening to AM-FM, press the right
arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there.
Press the left arrow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on
the front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow to
hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left arrow to
go back to the previous selection. The SEEK button is
inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use.

3-35

While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear the
next selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back
to the start of the current selection (if more than eight
seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if
the CD mode on the front radio (if equipped) or the
CD changer is in use.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into
SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for
a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and
momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK
again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM-FM
mode on the front radio is in use.
P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:

D Press this button to seek through the preset radio

stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.

D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.

D When a CD is playing in the CD changer,
press this button to select a disc.

3-36

TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between the tape
or CD and console-mounted CD changer if both are
loaded. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and
control any of the music sources, including AM-FM,
cassette tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) controller. However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat
passengers may listen to a cassette tape through
headphones while the driver listens to the radio through
the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control
of the volume for each set of headphones. Be aware that
the front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. The front seat passengers switch the
source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA
will play the same remote source. The rear speakers
will be muted when the RSA power is turned on.
You may operate the RSA functions even when the
main radio is off.
This feature is intended for rear seat passengers.

The following function is controlled by the knob on the
main radio:
PWR-VOL: Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA
system buttons:
PWR: Press this button to turn RSA on or off.
VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and
counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob
back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
The left VOL knob controls the left headphone and the
right VOL knob controls the right headphone.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to
AM-FM, the RSA controller will not switch between the
bands and cannot change the frequency.

SEEK: While listening to AM-FM, press the right
arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there.
Press the left arrow to tune to the next lower station
and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
The SEEK button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on
the front radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow
to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the left
arrow to go back to the previous selection. The SEEK
button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is
in use.
While listening to a CD, press the right arrow to hear the
next selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to go back
to the start of the current selection (if more than eight
seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive if
the CD mode on the front radio (if equipped) or the
CD changer is in use.

3-37

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into
SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for
a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and
momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK
again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM-FM
mode on the front radio is in use.

Console-Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)

P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be listening to
something different for each of these functions to work:

D Press this button to seek through the preset radio

stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.

D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.

D When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to select a disc.

3-38

Your vehicle’s compact disc changer is located in the
center console. Some vehicles may have the compact
disc changer mounted in the front console just below
the climate control system and accessory power outlets.
With the compact disc changer, you can play up to
six discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played
using the slots supplied in the magazine.

Close the door by sliding it all the way forward
(push the door closed on front console-mounted (CD)
changers). When the CD magazine is loaded, the changer
will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will
continue for up to one and a half minutes, depending on
the number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD
changer door all the way open, then press EJECT.
Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible
to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.

You must first load the magazine with discs before you
can play a compact disc. Load the CDs from bottom
to top, placing the discs in the magazine label side up.
If you load a disc label side down, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Repeat this procedure for
loading up to six discs in the magazine.
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine,
slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer
(push the door and it will open on front console-mounted
(CD) changers). Push the magazine into the changer in
the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine.

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the
radio display. If the CD changer is checking the
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the
display until the changer is ready to play. When a
CD begins playing, a disc and track number will be
displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of
the magazine.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo
with Cassette Tape Player (Bose), all of the CD changer
functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for
ejecting the CD magazine.

3-39

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc.
The disc number and track number will be displayed.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.

3-40

P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.
TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch
between the tape and console-mounted CD changer
if both are loaded.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo
with Compact Disc Player (Bose), all of the CD changer
functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for
ejecting the CD magazine.
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow
to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
(5): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number
and track number will be displayed.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
CD AUX: Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return to the radio
when a compact disc is playing. Press CD AUX to
switch between the compact disc and console-mounted
CD changer if both are loaded.

Compact Disc Changer Errors
If ERR appears on the display, it could be that:

D You are driving on a very rough road.

(The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

D A disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)

D The disc player is very hot.
D The CD changer door is open. Completely close
the changer door to restore normal operation.

D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one
of the trays.

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.

3-41

Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of
your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable
all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

3. Turn the radio off.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.

5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
It is recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

3-42

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
The LED indicator by the volume control will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.

Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with
the ignition on before you can try again. When you try
again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the “1” and “4” buttons together. Hold them
down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the code
matches the secret code you have written down. The
display will show ---, indicating that the radio
is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.

3-43

Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
PROG: Press this button
to play a station you
have programmed on the
radio preset buttons on the
selected band.

SEEK: Press the up arrow to tune to the next radio
station and the down arrow to tune to the previous
radio station.
If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the player
will advance with the up arrow and reverse with the
down arrow.
MUTE: Press this button
to silence the system.
Press it again to turn on
the sound.
VOL: Press the up or
down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.

If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play the
other side of the tape. If a compact disc is playing in the
console-mounted CD changer (if equipped), press this
button to go to the next available CD.

3-44

Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can
pick up noise from things like storms and power lines.
Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you
ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.

NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you
can add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

3-45

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears
on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.

3-46

The recommended cleaning method for your
cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a broken tape detection
feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken
tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being
ejected, use the following steps.

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Turn the radio on.
Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing
that the broken tape detection feature is no
longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the broken
tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

3-47

Care of Your Compact Discs

Care of Your Compact Disc Player

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.

Fixed Mast Antenna

Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender.

3-48

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-7
4-7
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15

Your Driving, the Road and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

4-29
4-30
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-41
4-43
4-46

Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

4-1

Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the
vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs.
But statistics show that the most important factor,
by far, is how we drive. Knowing how these three
factors work together can help you understand how
your vehicle handles and what you can do to avoid
many types of crashes, including a rollover crash.

Driver Behavior

Your Driving, the Road and
Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we’re taking on an important
responsibility. This is true for any motor
vehicle -- passenger car, van, truck or sport utility.

4-2

The single most important thing is this: everyone in
the vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.
See “Safety Belts” in the Index. In fact, most
serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted occupants
can be reduced or prevented by the use of safety belts.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
In addition, avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt
turns and drunken or aggressive driving can help make
trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash, especially
a rollover crash. This section provides many useful tips
to help you drive more safely.

Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash
by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at
night, or during other times where visibility or traction
may be limited (such as on curves, slippery roads or
hilly terrain). Unfamiliar surroundings can also have
hidden hazards. To help you learn more about driving
in different conditions, this section contains information
about city, freeway, and off-road driving, as well as
other hints for driving in various weather conditions.

Vehicle Design
According to the U.S. Department of Transportation,
utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do have
a higher ground clearance and a narrower track or
shorter wheelbase than passenger cars to make them
more capable for off-road driving. Specific design
characteristics like these give the driver a better view of
the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher center of
gravity than other types of vehicles. This means that you
shouldn’t expect a utility vehicle to handle the same way
a vehicle with a lower center of gravity, like a car, would
in similar situations.

But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause
of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or
vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding
the environment in which you’ll be driving can help
avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including
utility vehicles.

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See “Safety Belts” in the Index.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.

4-3

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task -- such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor -- makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.

In recent years, about 16,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the
use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Drunken Driving

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
D Judgment
D Muscular Coordination
D Vision
D Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving.

4-4

Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water than
men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means
that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level
than a man of her same body weight when each has the
same number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.

4-5

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at
night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

4-6

There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.

Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.

4-7

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time
to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.
If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-8

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is
an advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out
in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS.

4-9

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Steering

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.

Power Steering

Using Anti-Lock

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.

If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-10

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want
it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.

4-11

Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides

and to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center
line usually indicates it’s all right to pass (providing the
road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side
of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems
empty of approaching traffic.

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass

while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

4-13

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and

start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

4-14

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.

Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on
slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be
longer and vehicle control more limited.

Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.

This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.

4-15

Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the
fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you’ll be driving?
If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.

D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.

D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.

4-16

CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the

seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of
the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be struck
by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo
in the cargo area as far forward and low
as possible.

You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.

Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:

D Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses -- or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).

D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.

D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.

D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them,
the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.

4-17

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:

D you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.

D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.

D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.

CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.

Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its
many different features. Here are some things to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you
if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)

D Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?

4-18

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands
if you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across
a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t
do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.

CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one
of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.

4-19

On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top.
On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the
hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Driving Uphill

Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.

D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain

D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?

D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?

D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.

D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.

your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning
or sliding.

D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.

If the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.

won’t have to make turning maneuvers?

D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block

CAUTION:

your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment,
a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you
don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.

D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

4-20

Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways,
and possibly roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. When driving up hills, always
try to go straight up.

D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top

What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is
about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?

D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible

If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:

of the hill.

to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you’re there.

D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.

D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and

keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.

D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission

CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle.
You could be seriously injured or killed. As you
near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.

to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need

to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

4-21

D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand

on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best
that you back down the hill with your wheels straight
rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the
wheel too far to the left or right will increase the
possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are
about to stall, when going up a hill.

D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into

NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the
engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t
work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly
and you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back straight down.

4-22

D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to

stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough
to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you
to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it
up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.

Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t do it.
What should I do?

Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.

CAUTION:

Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to
consider a number of things:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual
transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is
because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer
case overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to PARK (P) (or, put your manual
transmission in FIRST (1)). But do not shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer
case in a drive gear.

D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
maintain vehicle control?

D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?

D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden

creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

4-23

D Never go downhill with the transmission in

CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause
loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the
brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a
low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

Are there some things I should not do
when driving down a hill?

Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a
serious accident.

D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you

across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.

4-24

NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal
pressed down in a manual shift. This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do
all the work and could overheat and fade.

Q:
A:

Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.

D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.

D Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the

manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.

D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.

D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.

Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:

D A hill that can be driven straight up or down

may be too steep to drive across. When you go
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base (the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across
an incline, the much more narrow track width
(the distance between the left and right wheels)
may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Also, driving across an incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause
a downhill slide or a rollover.

D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive

D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the

incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have
rolled over.

CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. If you have any doubt about
the steepness of the incline, don’t drive across it.
Find another route instead.

across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.

4-25

What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?

If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

4-26

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly,
turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer
braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.

CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.
Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you
and your passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.

4-27

If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown.
If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away
the ground from under your tires, and you could
lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.

4-28

After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.

Driving at Night

D Except Vehicles with Electrochromic Day/Night
Inside Rearview Mirror: Adjust your inside
rearview mirror to reduce the glare from
headlamps behind you.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to

slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.

4-29

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.

4-30

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they
show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.

4-31

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.

D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See “Tires” in the Index.

4-32

City Driving

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

4-33

Freeway Driving

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over
your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle
in your “blind” spot.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.

4-34

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

The exit speed is usually posted.

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-35

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,

service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on
the highway as an emergency.

4-36

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for information about
driving off-road.

CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
D

D
D

a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and
transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads.
Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-37

Winter Driving

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

4-38

Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

4-39

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-40

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.

Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle for use at your destination.
Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed
for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions
for the towing equipment.
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF.
To prevent your battery from draining while towing,
remove the RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the
instrument panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuses
when you reach your destination. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index.

4-41

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles and Vehicles
with the Electronic Shift Transfer Case
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and vehicles with the

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
(Automatic Transfer Case)

Electronic Shift Transfer Case should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground. These transmissions
have no provisions for internal lubrication while being
towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be
placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the
ground. Towing with all four wheels on the ground
should be avoided.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable and your vehicle
has to be towed with all four wheels on the ground,
the propeller shaft to axle yoke orientation should be
marked and the propeller shaft removed following
the applicable service manual removal/installation
procedure. See “Service and Owner Publications” in
the Index.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the vehicle.

4-42

Use the following procedure to correctly tow your
vehicle on all four wheels:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Place the transmission in PARK (P).
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.

4. With the engine running, shift the transfer case to
NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index
for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL
position for your vehicle.

Loading Your Vehicle

CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission,
or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual
transmission. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly set
before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.
See “Four-Wheel Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)”
in the Index.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks
the steering column and reduces battery drain.
Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper
movement of the front wheels and tires during towing.

The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, above the door latch. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR).

4-43

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.
Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out
your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.

Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings.
Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the
right way.

NOTICE:

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s Certification/Tire
label or consult your dealer for additional details.

CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.

4-44

Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

Payload

CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.

The payload capacity is shown on the Certification/Tire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
occupants as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the
factory, remember to subtract the weight of these things
from the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.

Electronic Level Control (If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the electronic level
control the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept
level as you load or unload your vehicle. However,
you should still not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.
The ignition has to be on for the level control to work.
The system includes a small electric air compressor and
air-adjustable rear shock absorbers.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system
self-adjusts. This is normal.

4-45

The compressor should operate for brief periods of time.
If the sound continues for an extended period of time,
your vehicle needs service. To keep your battery from
being drained, you may want to remove the LD LEV
fuse in the engine compartment fuse block until you
can get your vehicle serviced (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index).
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a
limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle.
Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install
the new equipment.

NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.

4-46

Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.

NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this part, and see your
dealer for important information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle. Additional rear axle
maintenance is required for a vehicle used to tow
a trailer. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services”
in the Index.

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in
this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.

4-47

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will

weigh 2,000 lbs. (900 kg) or less. You should always
use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more
than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg). You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.

4-48

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.

D If you have an automatic transmission, you can

use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear)
when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in
THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the life of your transmission.
If you have a manual transmission and you are
towing a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear.
Just drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to,
a lower gear). See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Tow/Haul Mode (V6 Engine, Automatic
Transmission Equipped Models) (If Equipped)
The tow/haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling
a heavy trailer. The purpose of the tow/haul mode is to
do the following:

The tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle
and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the maximum
trailer weight rating for the vehicle. See “Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating” and “Trailer Weight” in the Index.

D Reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a

The tow/haul mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most
useful under the following conditions:

D provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy

D When driving through hilly terrain at speeds

D reduce the need to change throttle position when

D when driving in low speed or stop and go traffic

heavy trailer,

trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded, and
pulling a heavy trailer.

This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button
on the floor console or the shift knob. When the feature
is on, a light located on the instrument panel cluster
will illuminate to indicate that the tow/haul mode has
been selected.
See “Tow/haul Mode Light” in the Index. The tow/haul
mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle
is started.

below 55 mph (88 km/h),

below 55 mph (88 km/h), and

D when driving in parking lots.
Use the tow/haul mode instead of the previous
recommendation to shift to THIRD (3) gear to improve
fuel economy at highway speeds and shift performance
at lower speeds. Operating in the tow/haul mode when
not pulling a heavy trailer will not cause damage to the
vehicle, but you may experience reduced fuel economy
and undesirable performance from the engine and
transmission. The tow/haul mode should be used
only when pulling a heavy trailer.

4-49

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Axle
Ratio
3.08
3.42

Max. Trailer Wt.
4,700 lbs. (2 133 kg)
5,700 lbs. (2 587 kg)

2-Wheel Drive,
2 Door
Manual Trans.

3.42

4,200 lbs. (1 906 kg)

2-Wheel Drive,
4 Door
Auto. Trans.

3.08
3.42

4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)

4-Wheel Drive,
2 Door
Auto. Trans.

3.08
3.42
3.73

4,400 lbs. (1 997 kg)
5,400 lbs. (2 451 kg)
5,400 lbs. (2 451 kg)

Vehicle
2-Wheel Drive,
2 Door
Auto. Trans.

4-50

Vehicle
4-Wheel Drive,
2 Door
Manual Trans.
ZR2
Auto. Trans.
Manual Trans.
4-Wheel Drive,
4 Door
Auto. Trans.
4-Wheel Drive,
4 Door
Manual Trans.

Axle
Ratio
3.42

Max. Trailer Wt.
3,900 lbs. (1 770 kg)

3.73
3.73
3.08
3.42
3.73

4,800 lbs. (2 179 kg)
4,300 lbs. (1 952 kg)
4,200 lbs. (1 906 kg)
5,200 lbs. (2 360 kg)
5,200 lbs. (2 360 kg)

3.42

3,700 lbs. (1 679 kg)

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight. The weight of the trailer tongue also
affects the maximum trailer weight. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” later in this section.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

4-51

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Safety Chains

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.

You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with
your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch
and sway control of the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you’re driving.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle. See “Carbon Monoxide” in the
Index. Dirt and water can, too.

4-52

Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:

D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

D The trailer’s brake system will use less than

0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends
fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing
for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide
(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t
see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
or death. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:
D Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
D Keep the rear-most windows closed.
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)

D If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air
into your vehicle. Do not use MAX A/C or
RECIRCULATION because it only
recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

4-53

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to
be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the same time.

Backing Up

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.

Making Turns

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.

NOTICE:

Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.

Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

4-54

Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher
(included in the optional trailering package).
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission, you should
use THIRD (3) when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will
minimize heat buildup and extend the life of your
transmission. Or, if you have a manual transmission,
it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear, just drive in
FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the
manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off.
If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.

4-55

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. Then turn your wheels into the curb
if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.

4-56

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with an
automatic transfer case, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to
roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL. See “Four-Wheel
Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important
in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid
(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling
system and brake system. Each of these is covered in
this manual, and the Index will help you find them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.

4-57

Trailer Wiring Harness
The light-duty trailer wiring is a six-wire harness
assembly. The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring is an
eight-wire harness assembly. The harnesses are stored
under the vehicle, along the passenger-side frame
crossmember on two-door vehicles or on the driver’s
side corner frame rear crossmember on four-door
vehicles. The heavy-duty trailer wiring is fused in the
engine compartment fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index. Both harnesses have no
connector and should be wired by a qualified
electrical technician. The technician can use the
following color code chart when connecting the
wiring harness to your trailer.

4-58

D Dark Blue: Use for electric trailer brakes or auxiliary
wiring (eight-wire harness only).
D Red: Use for battery charging; it connects to the
starter solenoid (eight-wire harness only).
D Light Green: Back-up lamps.
D Brown: Taillamps and parking lamps.
D Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
D Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
D White: Ground wire.
D Light Blue: Auxiliary stoplamp.
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break,
but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together
and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.

Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5-8
5-10

Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Cooling System

5-17
5-17
5-18
5-30
5-31

Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Press the button located
on top of the steering
column all the way down
to make your front and
rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

5-2

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.
But please use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or
jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks
clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when
there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and
a cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

5-3

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) and put a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL. Be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter, or accessory power outlets (if equipped).
Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as
radios. This will avoid sparks and help to save both
batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!

NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repair wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.

5-4

4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries.
(Your vehicle’s battery is located towards the front
of the vehicle, on the passenger side of the engine
compartment. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.) Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery.

CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
(or batteries) installed in every new GM vehicle.
But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to
take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.

6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect
positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other parts too.
And don’t connect the negative (-) to negative (-).

7. Don’t let the other
end touch metal.
Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal
of the good battery.

5-5

8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the
dead battery.

5-6

9. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts
that move. The electrical
connection is just as
good there, but the
chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is
much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t
start after a few tries, make sure all connections are
good. If it still won’t start, it probably needs service.

12. Remove the cables in reverse order following the
diagram and directions below to prevent electrical
shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each
other or any other metal.

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
negative (-) battery terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
positive (+) battery terminal on the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
positive battery terminal of the other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

5-7

Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” and “Recreational Vehicle Towing” in
the Index.

Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Gages” in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.

NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.

5-8

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D
D
D
D

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3) for
automatic transmissions.

5-9

Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan

5-10

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the ADD mark. If it isn’t, you may have
a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.

NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.

5-11

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank

NOTICE:

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOLR engine coolant at
the coolant recovery tank. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.

CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.

5-12

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

CAUTION: (Continued)
pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.

CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
CAUTION: (Continued)

5-13

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

5-14

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-15

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOLR coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.

5-16

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

Engine Fan Noise

If a Tire Goes Flat

This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:

You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-17

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.

CAUTION:

CAUTION: (Continued)
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear -- not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.

5-18

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored along the
driver’s side inner rear quarter panel. In some cases, you
may have to remove the spare tire in order to reach the
jack. Your vehicle is also equipped with work gloves
and a plastic ground mat to assist in the changing of
a flat tire.
1. To remove your jack
cover, pull up on the
latch(es) on the cover.
Remove the wheel
blocks, jack and
wheel wrench.

The following instructions explain how to remove the
spare tire, depending on where it is mounted on your
vehicle. See “Compact SpareTire” later in this section
for more information about the compact spare.

NOTICE:
Never remove or restow a tire from/to a stowage
position under the vehicle while the vehicle is
supported by a jack. Always tighten the tire fully
against the underside of the vehicle when restowing.
2. To remove the
underbody-mounted
spare, insert the
chisel end of the wheel
wrench, on an angle,
into the hoist shaft hole
in the rear bumper.
Be sure the chisel end
of the wheel wrench
connects into the
hoist shaft.

5-19

When the tire has been completely lowered, tilt the
retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

NOTICE:
To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive the
vehicle before the cable is properly stored.
If you have an inside-mounted spare tire, the tire must
be removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a hoist shaft hole
cover on the passenger side of the rear bumper. You
must remove this to gain access to the hoist shaft hole.
Insert your index finger into the indentation near the
lamp and pull to remove the cover.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the spare
tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

5-20

To remove an inside-mounted spare tire, reach into your
tire’s cover and unscrew the wing nut at the center of the
wheel. Remove it and the retainer. Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket and remove the cover.
To remove a rear-mounted spare tire, first make sure
that the carrier arm is fully-latched to the endgate.
Then remove the spare tire cover.

4. The locking wheel nut
can be removed by
snapping the rubber
weather cover off the
face of the lock case.

5. Insert the key and pull
the lock case straight
off. It is not necessary to
turn the key.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B). Your vehicle may also have an optional hub
cap removal tool.

6. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

5-21

Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench, or the hub
cap removal tool (if equipped), in the notch of the hub
cap and pry off the hub cap.
Some of the molded plastic hub caps have imitation
wheel nuts molded into them. The wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation nuts, so don’t try to remove them
with the socket end of the wheel wrench.

5-22

If you have individual wheel nut caps that cover each
nut, they must be removed in order to get to the wheel
nuts. Use the socket end of the wheel wrench to remove
the wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach your hub cap to
the wheel. Remove these wheel nut caps before you
take off the hub cap.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire

A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole (2-Door) or Spring Hanger
Hole (4-Door)
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack lift head.
3. Fit the jack into the appropriate hole nearest the flat tire.

5-23

CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.

5-24

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the spare tire to fit.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.

CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
7. Place the spare on the wheel mounting surface.

CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.

8. Put the nuts on by hand.
Make sure the rounded
end is toward the wheel.

Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against
the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand, use the wheel
wrench and see your dealer as soon as possible.

5-25

CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb-ft (140 N·m).
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
10. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

5-26

NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.

NOTICE:
An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the hoist.
However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
have the wheel repaired as soon as possible.

Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted spare.
A. Retainer
B. Valve Stem
(Pointed Down)
C. Spare or Flat Tire
D. Spring
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Lower
G. Raise
H. Hoist Arm

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear.
2. Pull the retainer through the wheel.
3. Put the chisel end of the wheel wrench, on an angle,
through the hole in the rear bumper and into the
hoist shaft.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire
hoist cannot be overtightened.

5-27

Follow this diagram for the inside-mounted spare.

5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.

5-28

A. Spare or Flat Tire
B. Retainer
C. Nut

D. Wheel Carrier
E. Hook

Follow this diagram for the rear-mounted spare.

Reinstall the locking wheel nut using the wheel wrench.
Then push the lock case onto the lug nut until it stops.
The key does not have to be inserted into the lock. Push
the lock case to be sure it is secured. The special lug nut
and lock case is not intended to be used on any road
wheel, only on the spare wheel carrier. Tighten the nuts
on the wheel carrier to 22 to 32 lb-ft (30 to 40 N·m).

CAUTION:
Make sure the tire and carrier are secure.
Driving with the tire or carrier unlatched
could injure pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
A. Wheel Carrier
B. Spare or Flat Tire
C. Wheel Nut and Locking Nut Cylinder

5-29

Return the jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the
proper location in your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the
items and replace the jack cover.

Compact Spare Tire (If Equipped)
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best
to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you
can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.

A. Retainer
B. Rubber Band
(Some Models)
C. Work Gloves
D. Mat
E. Jack Storage Cover
F. Wheel Blocks

5-30

G. Hub Cap
Removal Tool
(Some Models)
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack
J. Jacking Instructions

NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.

CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow

NOTICE:

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

5-31

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

Using the Recovery Hooks

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery
hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be
towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.

5-32

CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The
hooks could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.

5-33

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-11
6-16
6-17
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-24
6-27
6-28
6-28

Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Rear Axle
Four-Wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid

6-30
6-34
6-35
6-42
6-44
6-53
6-53
6-56
6-57
6-61
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-72
6-72
6-73

Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.

Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which were developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and
endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers
Association for better vehicle performance and engine
protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification
could provide improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other gasolines.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the fuel pump.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.

Canada Only

6-3

Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get
rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected.

6-4

The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”
in the Index. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of
failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of
the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask your service station operator
whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
If fuels containing MMT are used, spark plug life
may be reduced and your emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have
to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol,
and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.

6-5

Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.

While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to
the right.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged door on driver’s side of
your vehicle.

6-6

CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the
right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

6-8

Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull
the handle located inside
the vehicle on the lower
driver’s side of the
instrument panel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.

Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood. Your vehicle
may have a lamp that comes on when you lift the hood.

6-9

Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

A.
B.
C.
D.

Battery
Coolant Recovery Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill

6-10

E. Automatic
Transmission Dipstick
F. Power Steering Reservoir
G. Brake Master Cylinder

H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
I. Fuse Block
J. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
Then just pull the hood down firmly to close. It will
latch when dropped from 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressing on the hood.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The oil dipstick handle is
a yellow ring located
toward the passenger side
of the engine compartment.
See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index
for more information
on location.

6-11

When to Add Engine Oil

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
The engine oil fill cap is located toward the passenger
side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

6-12

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If
you have your oil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is best for
your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s
going to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on
an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not
use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide

easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

6-13

Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city
maintenance schedule:

D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.

D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
D You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
off-road frequently.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.

D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.

6-14

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.

Remote Oil Filter (Four-Wheel Drive)
The access door for the
remote oil filter is in the
steering linkage shield
assembly located under the
radiator support. Turn the
screw to unlock or lock the
door. If you open the door,
make sure it is securely
closed when you
are finished.

What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.
See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.

6-15

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3. Insert a new engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
5. Tighten the fasteners to hold the cover in place.

CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located toward the front of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index for
more information on engine air cleaner/filter location.
To remove the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Remove the fasteners that hold the cover on.
2. Remove the cover and lift out the engine
air cleaner/filter.

6-16

NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

How to Check

When to Check and Change

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:

NOTICE:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

D
D
D
D

When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.

6-17

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180_F to 200_F
(82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50_F (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50_F (10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will
give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).

D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Locate the handle
for the automatic
transmission dipstick
near the rear of the
engine compartment.

Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the

See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the Index
for more information on location.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever

Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

engine running.
in PARK (P).

6-18

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

NOTICE:
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”

D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-19

Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine
oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’t require changing.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission is cool
enough for you to rest your fingers on the transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:

How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.

6-20

1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.

How to Add Fluid

When to Check and What to Use

Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.

Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

6-21

Rear Axle

What to Use

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check Lubricant

Four-Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have
two additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

6-22

How to Check Lubricant

Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.

6-23

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise
the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:

When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.

D
D
D
D
D

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.

6-24

Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.

NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-25

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD, or a
little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should
be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

CAUTION:

The coolant recovery tank is located near the passenger
side of the engine compartment toward the front of the
vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for more information on location.

6-26

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.

Radiator Pressure Cap

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see “Cooling System” in the Index.

NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.

6-27

Power Steering Fluid

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the proper range.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
The power steering reservoir is located near the center of
the engine compartment. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for more information on location.

6-28

Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located toward
the front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
the Index for more information on location.

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY with
the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.

6-29

Brakes
Brake Fluid

When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up.
The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake
system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t
work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in the Index for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear.

6-30

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot
enough. You or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

Checking Brake Fluid

What to Add
You can check the
brake fluid without
taking off the cap.

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.

6-31

NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.

6-32

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.

Brake Adjustment

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual
under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.

The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.

6-33

Battery

Vehicle Storage

Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco
battery. See “Engine Compartment Overview” in the
Index for battery location.

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.

6-34

Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealer’s service department.

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

CAUTION:
The low beam High Intensity Discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try
to service any of the system components, you
could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or
a qualified technician service them.

6-35

Headlamps
One-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to
remove it.
6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.

7. Plug in the electrical connector.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.

4. Unplug the electrical connector.

9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-36

Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System
1. Open the hood.

4. Unplug the electrical connector.

2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to
remove it.
6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-37

Composite High-Beam Headlamp System (Vehicles
with High Intensity Discharge Lighting Only)
1. Open the hood.

5. Turn the bulb/socket assembly counterclockwise to
remove it.

2. Remove the black retainer clips by lifting up.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.

6-38

6. Put the new bulb/socket assembly into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
9. Install the two retaining clips.

One-Piece Front Turn Signal
Lamp Assembly

3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from
the socket.

1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“One-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier
in this section.

4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps
into place.

2. Twist the bulb socket to
remove it from the
headlamp assembly.

5. Put the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and turn
it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
Install the two retaining clips.
7. Install the two retaining clips.

6-39

Two-Piece Front Turn Signal
Lamp Assembly
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as shown under
“Two-Piece Composite Headlamp System” earlier
in this section.
2. Locate the locking tabs
on the assembly.
Squeeze the tabs
together and push that
end of the assembly out
while holding the tabs.
The assembly will
swing out.

4. Turn the harness bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
5. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place.

3. Unplug the electrical connector.

7. Reinstall the harness bulb socket with the new bulb
into the headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise
until it is tight.
8. To reinstall the assembly, snap the outboard end of
the lamp assembly back into the vehicle. Then swing
the assembly in and snap it into place.
9. Install the two retaining clips.

6-40

Taillamps

3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.

1. Open the endgate/liftgate.

4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it.
Push the tab in while you turn the
socket counterclockwise.

2. Remove the two screws
from the lamp assembly.

5. Holding the base of the bulb, pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until
it clicks.
7. Put the socket into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise until it locks in place.
8. Install the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
9. Close the endgate/liftgate.

6-41

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Windshield
Wiper Blade Check” in the Index for more information.
See “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index for the proper type of replacement blade.

NOTICE:
Use care when removing or installing a blade
assembly. Accidental bumping can cause the
arm to fall back and strike the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab

D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking tab.
Pull down on the blade assembly to release it from
the wiper arm hook.

6-42

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.

A. Claw in Notch
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade claws (A).
Slide the insert all the way through the blade claws at the
opposite end (B). The plastic caps (C) will be forced off
as the insert is fully inserted.

B. Correct Installation

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.

C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook slot.

6-43

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
See “Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement” in this
section for instructions on how to change the backglass
wiper blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock
in a vertical position like the windshield wiper blade,
so care should be used when pulling it away from
the vehicle.

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details.

6-44

CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction. You could
have an air-out and a serious accident.
See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.

Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label, which is on the driver’s
door edge, above the door latch, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

6-45

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” in the Index.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most
important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Index for scheduled rotation intervals.

When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, don’t include it
in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

6-46

When It’s Time for New Tires

CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.

One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.

6-47

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an
“MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare
(if you have one). It was developed for use on
your vehicle.

CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-48

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-49

Temperature -- A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
by law.

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

6-50

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose
control. You could have a collision in which you or
others could be injured. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

6-51

Tire Chains

NOTICE:
Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your
vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
NOTICE: (Continued)

6-52

NOTICE: (Continued)
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Gasoline
Benzene

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.

Naphtha

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Carbon Tetrachloride

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean
normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

6-53

Here are some cleaning tips:

D
D
D
D

Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the

2. If a stain remains, follow the Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner instructions described earlier.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.

entire area immediately or it will set.

1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

6-54

4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

Cleaning Vinyl

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain

if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components

Cleaning Leather

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

Cleaning Wood Panels

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.

Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water
(use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood
immediately with a clean cloth.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.

6-55

Care of Safety Belts

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Keep belts clean and dry.

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.

CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.

6-56

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone
grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During
very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
the Index.

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

6-57

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

6-58

NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the paint
finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

6-59

Finish Damage

Chemical Paint Spotting

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control
can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed,
accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody
parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.

6-60

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427

SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)

1052918**

8 oz. (0.237 L)

DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner

t Protectant

Armor All

Multi-Purpose
Interior Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925

16 oz. (0.473 L)

USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-61

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

6-62

D
D
D
D

your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker
and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice,
the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is
caused by some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle and the
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go
on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused
by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band
is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.

6-63

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located at the
driver’s end of the
instrument panel.

Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. Extra fuses and the fuse extractor are
provided in the cover. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.

Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
A
B
1
2

6-64

Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Cigarette Lighter,
Data Link Connector

Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
3

Usage

9
10

Cruise Control Module and
Switch, Body Control Module,
Heated Seats
Gages, Body Control Module,
Instrument Panel Cluster
Parking Lamps, Power Window
Switch, Body Control Module,
Ashtray Lamp
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
Headlamps Switch, Body Control
Module, Headlamp Relay
Courtesy Lamps, Battery
Run-Down Protection
HVAC Control Head (Manual)
Turn Signal

11
12

Cluster, Engine Control Module
Interior Lights

4
5

6
7
8

Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
13
14
15

Usage
Auxiliary Power

Power Locks Motor
4WD Switch, Engine Controls
(VCM, PCM, Transmission)
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

17
18
19
20

Front Wiper
Steering Wheel Radio Controls
Radio, Battery
Amplifier

HVAC (Manual),
HVAC I (Automatic),
HVAC Sensors (Automatic)
Anti-Lock Brakes

23
24

Rear Wiper
Radio, Ignition

6-65

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The fuse block is located under the hood at the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location. Before using this fuse block
picture and chart, check to see that it matches the fuse
block in your vehicle. If the fuse block pictured here is
different than your vehicle’s, use the fuse block picture
and chart located later in this section.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.

6-66

Name
LT TRN
RT TRN
RR PRK
TRL PRK
LTHDLP
RTHDLP
FRPRK
INT BAT
ENG I
ECM B

Name
TRL TRN
TRR TRN
TRL B/U
VEH B/U
RT TURN
LT TURN
HDLP W/W

Usage
Trailer Left Turn
Trailer Right Turn
Trailer Back Up Lamps
Vehicle Back Up Lamps
Right Turn Signal Front
Left Turn Signal Front
Not Used

ABS
ECM I
A/C
W/W PMP
HORN
BTSI
B/U LP
IGN B
RAP

Usage
Left Turn Signal Rear
Right Turn Signal Rear
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Trailer Park Lamps
Left Headlamp
Right Headlamp
Front Parking Lamps
I/P Fuse Block Feed
Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,
CAM, PURGE, VENT
Engine Control Module, Fuel
Pump Module, Oil Pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Control Module Injectors
Air Conditioning
Not Used
Horn
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Back Up Lamps
Column Feed, IGN 2, 3, 4
Retained Accessory Power

6-67

Name
LD LEV
OXYSEN
IGN E
MIR/LKS
FOG LP
IGN A
STUD #2
PARKLP
LR PRK
IGN C
HTDSEAT
HVAC

6-68

Usage
Not Used
Oxygen Sensor
Engine
Mirrors, Door Locks
Fog Lamps
Starting and Charging IGN 1
Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
Parking Lamps
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Starter Solenoid,
Fuel Pump, PRNDL
Heated Seat
HVAC System

Name
TRCHMSL
RRDFOG
TBC
CRANK
HAZLP
VECHMSL
HTDMIR
ATC
STOPLP
RR W/W

Usage
Trailer Center High Mount
Stop Light
Rear Defogger
Truck Body Computer
Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
Hazard Lamps
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
Heated Mirror
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive)
Stop Lamps
Rear Window Wiper

Engine Compartment Fuse Block
(Vehicles with HID Headlamps)

The fuse block is located under the hood at the driver’s
side of the engine compartment. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in the Index for more
information on location. Before using this fuse block
picture and chart, check to see that it matches the fuse
block in your vehicle. If the fuse block pictured here is
different than your vehicle’s, use the fuse block picture
and chart located earlier in this section.
Remove the cover by turning the fastener
counterclockwise. To reinstall the fuse panel cover,
push in and turn the fastener clockwise.

6-69

Name
RT TRN
RR PRK
TRL PRK
LT LOW
RT LOW
FRPRK
INT BAT
ENG I
ECM B

Name
TRL TRN
TRR TRN
TRL B/U
VEH B/U
RT TURN
LT TURN
LT TRN

6-70

Usage
Trailer Left Turn
Trailer Right Turn
Trailer Back-Up Lamps
Vehicle Back-Up Lamps
Right Turn Signal Front
Left Turn Signal Front
Left Turn Signal Rear

ABS
ECM I
A/C
LT HI
RT HI
HORN
BTSI
B/U LP
DRL
IGN B

Usage
Right Turn Signal Rear
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Trailer ParkingLamps
Low-Beam Headlamp, Left
Low-Beam Headlamp, Right
Front Parking Lamps
I/P Fuse Block Feed
Engine Sensors/Solenoids, MAF,
CAM, PURGE, VENT
Engine Control Module, Fuel
Pump, Module, Oil Pressure
Anti-Lock Brake System
Engine Control Module Injectors
Air Conditioning
High-Beam Headlamp, Left
High-Beam Headlamp, Right
Horn
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System
Back-Up Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Column Feed, IGN 2, 3, 4

Name
RAP
LDLEV
OXYSEN
IGN E
MIR/LKS
FOG LP
IGN A
STUD #2
PARKLP
LR PRK
IGN C
HTDSEAT
HVAC

Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Electronic Load Leveling
Oxygen Sensor
Engine
Mirrors, Door Locks
Fog Lamps
Starting and Charging, IGN 1
Accessory Feeds, Electric Brake
Parking Lamps
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Starter Solenoid, Fuel Pump,
PRNDL
Heated Seats
HVAC System

Name
TRCHMSL
HI BEAM
RRDFOG
TBC
CRANK
HAZLP
VECHMSL
HTDMIR
ATC
STOPLP
RR W/W

Usage
Trailer Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
High-Beam Headlamps
Rear Defogger
Truck Body Computer
Clutch Switch, NSBU Switch
Hazard Lamps
Vehicle Center
High-Mounted Stoplamp
Heated Mirror
Automatic Transfer Case
Stoplamps
Rear Window Wiper

6-71

Replacement Bulbs
Lamps

Capacities and Specifications

Quantity

Number

Halogen Headlamps,
Composite Low Beam

9006 HB4 or
9006LL

Halogen Headlamps,
Composite High Beam

9005 HB3

Tail and Stop Lamps

3057

Front
Sidemarker Lamps

194 NA

Turn Signal Lamps

3457A

6-72

Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . “VORTEC” 4300
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V6
VIN Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 at 4,400 rpm
Thermostat Specification . . . . . . . . . . . 195_F (91_C)
Spark Plug Gap . . . . . . . . . . 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

Wheels and Tires
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N·m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . See the Certification/Tire label.
See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Capacities
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
Cooling System*
Automatic Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.1 L)
Manual Trans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 quarts (11.3 L)
Crankcase* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.3 L)
Automatic Transmission
(Drain and Refill)* . . . . . . . . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 L)
Differential Fluid
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 pints (1.9 L)
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 pints (1.2 L)
Fuel Tank
(2-Door Models) . . . . 19.0 U.S. gallons (72.0 L)
Fuel Tank
(4-Door Models) . . . . 18.0 U.S. gallons (68.0 L)
A/C Refrigerant . . . . . . See refrigerant charge label
under the hood.
*All capacities are approximate. After refill, the level
must be checked.

Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are
based on the latest information available at the time of
printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this
manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please
contact your GM dealer.
Thermostat** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12559051
Oil Filter* (2-Wheel Drive) . . . PF47 (PF52 Optional)
Oil Filter* (4-Wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF52
Air Cleaner Filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1163C
PCV Valve* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV769C
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit** . . . . 24200796
Spark Plugs* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-932
Fuel Filter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF481
Front Windshield
Wiper Blade . . . . . . . . . . Trico 20 inches (50.8 cm)
Backglass Wiper Blade . . . Trico 14 inches (35.6 cm)
*ACDelcoR Part No.
**GM Part No.

6-73

Vehicle Dimensions*
Wheelbase
2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100.5 inches (255.3 cm)
4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.0 inches (271.8 cm)
Length
2WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . 175.0 inches (444.5 cm)
2WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . 175.4 inches (445.5 cm)
4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181.1 inches (460.0 cm)
Height
2WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.0 inches (167.6 cm)
4WD 2-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 66.9 inches (170.0 cm)
2WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 65.9 inches (167.4 cm)
4WD 4-Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.0 inches (170.2 cm)

6-74

Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Tread
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tread
2WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

67.8 inches (172.2 cm)
55.0 inches (139.6 cm)
57.3 inches (145.4 cm)
54.7 inches (138.8 cm)
55.1 inches (139.9 cm)

*Figures reflect base equipment only.

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-8
7-30

Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

7-42
7-47
7-49
7-52

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record

7-1

Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

7-2

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.

How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you
should have done and when you should schedule them.
If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll
know that GM-trained and supported service people
will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

7-4

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

D are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
schedule to follow:

Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if
any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:

D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.

D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.

One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.

Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and
Filter Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs
first). Drive Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty
conditions. Automatic Transmission Service
(severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case
Fluid Change.
(Continued)

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.

7-6

Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of
the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.

Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Transfer Case
Fluid Change.

Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.

7-7

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will not
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance
services be performed at the indicated intervals and
the maintenance be recorded.

7-8

# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, parking brake cable guides, propshaft splines,
universal joints and brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.
** Drive axle service. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index for proper lubricant to use:

D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving
D
D

in dusty areas or when towing a trailer, drain fluid
and refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
If your vehicle has a locking differential,
drain fluid and refill at first engine oil change.
More frequent lubrication may be required for
heavy-duty or off-road use.

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

6,000 Miles (10 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-9

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

12,000 Miles (20 000 km)

7-10

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).

7-11

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

21,000 Miles (35 000 km)

7-12

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

27,000 Miles (45 000 km)

7-13

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-14

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

36,000 Miles (60 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

7-15

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

42,000 Miles (70 000 km)

7-16

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

7-17

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j

previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

7-18

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

54,000 Miles (90 000 km)

7-19

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

7-20

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

j
j

63,000 Miles (105 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-21

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

69,000 Miles (115 000 km)

7-22

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

(Continued)

7-23

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) (Continued)
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

78,000 Miles (130 000 km)

7-24

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

84,000 Miles (140 000 km)

7-25

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.

7-26

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

93,000 Miles (155 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-27

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

99,000 Miles (165 000 km)

7-28

Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j
j

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

7-29

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

7-30

D Check fluid level and add fluid as needed.
D If your vehicle has a locking differential, drain fluid
and refill at first engine oil change.

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

(Continued)

7-31

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) (Continued)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-32

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.

7-33

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

7-34

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe conditions listed previously and,
j

therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid, change both the
fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.
Automatic Transfer Case Only: Change transfer case fluid.

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-35

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)

j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking. (See footnote **.)
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-36

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance

j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace fuel filter.

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-37

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

7-38

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

(Continued)

7-39

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

7-40

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j
j

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

7-41

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.

Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.

At Each Fuel Fill

At Least Once a Month

It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in
the Index for further details.

Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.

7-42

Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.

At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.

Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel wrench
to tighten the cable. See “Storing the Spare Tire and
Tools” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.

7-43

Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Manual Transmission Fluid” in the Index.
Check for leaks. A fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.

At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.

Automatic Transmission Check

Body Lubrication Service

Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system
and repair if needed.

Lubricate all hood hinges, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
door hinges, fuel door hinge, endgate hinges, outer
tailgate handle pivot points, tailgate hinges, tailgate
mounted spare tire (if equipped), glove box,
console doors, moving seat hardware and folding
seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.

Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir.
See “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired at once.

7-44

Starter Switch Check

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works
in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around
the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position,
but don’t start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

7-45

Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

D With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).

D With a manual transmission, the key should turn to

LOCK only when you press the key release button.

On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding

ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

7-46

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections

Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection

Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.

Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the
drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage.
Replace seals if necessary.

Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.

7-47

Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the
cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at
least once a year.

Transfer Case and Front Axle
(Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem;
check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent hose
at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. More
frequent lubrication may be required on off-road use.

Throttle System Inspection

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.

7-48

Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil

Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol of the proper viscosity.
To determine the preferred
viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,
see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only
GM GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR
or HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.

USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.

Hydraulic
Clutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345347 or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).

Parking Brake
Cable Guides

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Power Steering
System

GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).

7-49

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Manual
Transmission

Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349
or equivalent).

Rear Axle
(Locking
Differential)

Axle Lubricant; use only GM
Part No. 1052271. Do not add
friction modifier.

Automatic
Transfer Case

AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378508).

Automatic
Transmission

DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock
Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Chassis
Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Front and Rear
Axle (Standard
Differential)

7-50

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. 1052271
or equivalent).

Rear Driveline
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
Center Spline and No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
Universal Joints
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

USAGE

Clutch Pushrod
to Clutch
Fork Joint

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Tailgate Mounted Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Spare Tire Carrier SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
(if equipped),
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and Hinges

Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Hood and
Door Hinges

LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. 12345579
or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Squeaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).

7-51

Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the
boxes provided after the maintenance interval. Any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or
“Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-52

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Maintenance Record
DATE

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-53

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-54

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance

8-8
8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11

Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors

8-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should
file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce
any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners
refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

8-3

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

8-4

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)

From:
Puerto Rico:
U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
1-800-496-9994

313-381-0022 (Fax Number)

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52 - 53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver
or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-5

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone,
our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer
recommended service providers. Roadside membership
is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

D Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over-the-phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs

To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2001 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone
roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.

8-6

(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2001 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2001 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies
that will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any payment obligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.

8-7

Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.

8-8

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service
to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to
a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Additional Program Information

Warranty Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.

8-9

REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE UNITED
STATES GOVERNMENT

REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS TO THE
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

8-10

Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170

8-11

2001 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2001 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2001 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207

8-12

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
Visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

2
0
0
1

PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL
NAME

YEAR

QTY.

PRICE
EACH*

Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair

2001

$120.00

2001

$50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

2001

$20.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

2001

$15.00

TOTAL
PRICE

G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(STATE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(ZIP CODE)

(

)

AREA CODE

GM-CHE-ORD99

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T

Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)

TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing

MasterCard
VISA

$6.00

Canadian Postage

GRAND TOTAL

Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:

Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.

8-13

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Description                     : Owner's Manual
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 09:46:47-05:00
Creator                         : Copyright General Motors Corp. 2000
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 3280482
Author                          : Copyright General Motors Corp. 2000
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 10:37:28-05:00
Sha 1                           : 2d5b3953912f740872e1c06b77666a4f4227aa73
Modify Date                     : 2000:09:19 06:59:54-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2000:09:19 06:59:54-04:00
Keywords                        : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2001/chevrolet/blazer
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 448

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Chevrolet 2001 Blazer Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation